Mercurial > emacs
annotate man/texinfo.tex @ 82763:4146a20f4623
Follow reorganization of files in etc/.
author | Romain Francoise <romain@orebokech.com> |
---|---|
date | Wed, 22 Aug 2007 17:50:31 +0000 |
parents | cd3e38bb3dc7 |
children | a66921565bcb |
rev | line source |
---|---|
37713 | 1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. |
2 % | |
3 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. | |
4 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi | |
5 % | |
81778 | 6 \def\texinfoversion{2007-07-09.21} |
69769 | 7 % |
8 % Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, | |
77025 | 9 % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, |
10 % 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | |
37713 | 11 % |
12 % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or | |
13 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as | |
14 % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at | |
15 % your option) any later version. | |
16 % | |
17 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be | |
18 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty | |
19 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU | |
20 % General Public License for more details. | |
21 % | |
22 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
23 % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write | |
64083 | 24 % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, |
25 % Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA. | |
37713 | 26 % |
69769 | 27 % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing |
28 % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without | |
29 % restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) | |
37713 | 30 % |
31 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug | |
32 % reports; you can get the latest version from: | |
69769 | 33 % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or |
47284 | 34 % ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex |
69769 | 35 % (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). |
36 % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out | |
37713 | 37 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
38 % |
37713 | 39 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a |
40 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the | |
41 % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. | |
42 % | |
43 % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the | |
44 % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple | |
45 % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: | |
46 % tex foo.texi | |
47 % texindex foo.?? | |
48 % tex foo.texi | |
49 % tex foo.texi | |
47284 | 50 % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. |
51 % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. | |
37713 | 52 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more |
53 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. | |
54 % | |
69769 | 55 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some |
56 % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the | |
57 % full Texinfo distribution. | |
58 % | |
59 % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. | |
60 | |
37713 | 61 |
62 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} | |
63 | |
64 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number | |
65 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because | |
66 % they might have appeared in the input file name. | |
67 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% | |
68 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} | |
69 | |
77025 | 70 |
69769 | 71 \chardef\other=12 |
72 | |
73 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. | |
74 % For @tex, we can use \tabalign. | |
75 \let\+ = \relax | |
76 | |
77 % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. | |
37713 | 78 \let\ptexb=\b |
79 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet | |
80 \let\ptexc=\c | |
81 \let\ptexcomma=\, | |
82 \let\ptexdot=\. | |
83 \let\ptexdots=\dots | |
84 \let\ptexend=\end | |
85 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv | |
86 \let\ptexexclam=\! | |
69769 | 87 \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote |
88 \let\ptexgtr=> | |
89 \let\ptexhat=^ | |
37713 | 90 \let\ptexi=\i |
69769 | 91 \let\ptexindent=\indent |
92 \let\ptexinsert=\insert | |
37713 | 93 \let\ptexlbrace=\{ |
69769 | 94 \let\ptexless=< |
95 \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite | |
96 \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent | |
97 \let\ptexplus=+ | |
37713 | 98 \let\ptexrbrace=\} |
69769 | 99 \let\ptexslash=\/ |
37713 | 100 \let\ptexstar=\* |
101 \let\ptext=\t | |
102 | |
103 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it | |
104 % starts a new line in the output. | |
105 \newlinechar = `^^J | |
106 | |
69769 | 107 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error |
108 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. | |
109 % | |
110 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined | |
111 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. | |
112 \else | |
113 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} | |
114 \fi | |
115 | |
37713 | 116 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set. |
117 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi | |
118 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi | |
119 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi | |
120 \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi | |
121 \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi | |
122 \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi | |
123 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi | |
124 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi | |
125 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi | |
126 \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi | |
127 \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi | |
128 \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi | |
129 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi | |
130 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi | |
131 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi | |
132 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi | |
133 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi | |
134 \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi | |
135 \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi | |
136 % | |
137 \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi | |
138 \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi | |
139 \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi | |
140 \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi | |
141 \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi | |
142 \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi | |
143 \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi | |
144 \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi | |
145 \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi | |
146 \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi | |
147 \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi | |
148 \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi | |
149 % | |
150 \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi | |
151 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi | |
152 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi | |
153 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi | |
154 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi | |
69769 | 155 |
156 % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. | |
157 \chardef\spacecat = 10 | |
158 \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} | |
37713 | 159 |
74360 | 160 % sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences. |
161 \chardef\colonChar = `\: | |
162 \chardef\commaChar = `\, | |
163 \chardef\dashChar = `\- | |
164 \chardef\dotChar = `\. | |
165 \chardef\exclamChar= `\! | |
166 \chardef\lquoteChar= `\` | |
167 \chardef\questChar = `\? | |
168 \chardef\rquoteChar= `\' | |
169 \chardef\semiChar = `\; | |
170 \chardef\underChar = `\_ | |
171 | |
37713 | 172 % Ignore a token. |
173 % | |
174 \def\gobble#1{} | |
175 | |
69769 | 176 % The following is used inside several \edef's. |
177 \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} | |
178 | |
179 % Hyphenation fixes. | |
180 \hyphenation{ | |
181 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script | |
182 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps | |
183 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script | |
184 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm | |
185 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces | |
186 spell-ing spell-ings | |
187 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space | |
188 wide-spread wrap-around | |
189 } | |
37713 | 190 |
191 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. | |
69769 | 192 \newdimen\bindingoffset |
193 \newdimen\normaloffset | |
37713 | 194 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight |
195 | |
69769 | 196 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles |
197 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided | |
198 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). | |
199 % | |
200 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} | |
201 | |
202 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should | |
203 % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the | |
204 % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would | |
205 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main | |
206 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). | |
207 % | |
208 \def\|{% | |
209 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. | |
210 \leavevmode | |
211 % | |
212 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. | |
213 \vadjust{% | |
214 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current | |
215 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. | |
216 \vskip-\baselineskip | |
217 % | |
218 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So | |
219 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. | |
220 \llap{% | |
221 % | |
222 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. | |
223 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt | |
224 % | |
225 % This is the space between the bar and the text. | |
226 \hskip 12pt | |
227 }% | |
228 }% | |
229 } | |
230 | |
37713 | 231 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file |
232 % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, | |
69769 | 233 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make |
234 % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log | |
235 % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. | |
37713 | 236 % |
237 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% | |
69769 | 238 \def\loggingall{% |
239 \tracingstats2 | |
240 \tracingpages1 | |
241 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex | |
242 \tracingparagraphs1 | |
243 \tracingoutput1 | |
244 \tracingmacros2 | |
245 \tracingrestores1 | |
246 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen | |
247 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging | |
248 \tracingscantokens1 | |
249 \tracingifs1 | |
250 \tracinggroups1 | |
251 \tracingnesting2 | |
252 \tracingassigns1 | |
253 \fi | |
254 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex | |
255 \errorcontextlines16 | |
37713 | 256 }% |
257 | |
47284 | 258 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing |
259 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
260 % |
47284 | 261 \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount |
262 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} | |
263 \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount | |
264 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} | |
265 \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount | |
266 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} | |
267 | |
37713 | 268 % For @cropmarks command. |
269 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. | |
270 % | |
271 \newif\ifcropmarks | |
272 \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue | |
273 % | |
274 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. | |
275 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 | |
276 % | |
277 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines | |
278 \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc | |
279 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt | |
280 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in | |
281 | |
282 % Main output routine. | |
283 \chardef\PAGE = 255 | |
284 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} | |
285 | |
286 \newbox\headlinebox | |
287 \newbox\footlinebox | |
288 | |
289 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents | |
290 % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. | |
291 \def\onepageout#1{% | |
292 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi | |
293 % | |
294 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset | |
295 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi | |
296 % | |
297 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in | |
298 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). | |
299 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% | |
300 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% | |
301 % | |
302 {% | |
303 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to | |
304 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends | |
305 % before the \shipout runs. | |
306 % | |
307 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. | |
308 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if | |
69769 | 309 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. |
310 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: | |
311 % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} | |
312 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; | |
313 % it needs to be | |
314 % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} | |
37713 | 315 \shipout\vbox{% |
316 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. | |
69769 | 317 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi |
37713 | 318 % |
319 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup | |
320 \hsize = \outerhsize | |
321 \vskip-\topandbottommargin | |
322 \vtop to0pt{% | |
323 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% | |
324 \nointerlineskip | |
325 \line{% | |
326 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% | |
327 \hfill | |
328 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% | |
329 }% | |
330 \vss}% | |
331 \vskip\topandbottommargin | |
332 \line\bgroup | |
333 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. | |
334 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi | |
335 \vbox\bgroup | |
336 \fi | |
337 % | |
338 \unvbox\headlinebox | |
339 \pagebody{#1}% | |
340 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt | |
341 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. | |
72317 | 342 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) |
37713 | 343 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. |
72317 | 344 \vskip 24pt |
37713 | 345 \unvbox\footlinebox |
346 \fi | |
347 % | |
348 \ifcropmarks | |
349 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup | |
350 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup | |
351 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill | |
352 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick | |
353 \vbox to0pt{\vss | |
354 \line{% | |
355 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% | |
356 \hfill | |
357 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% | |
358 }% | |
359 \nointerlineskip | |
360 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% | |
361 }% | |
362 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause | |
363 \fi | |
364 }% end of \shipout\vbox | |
69769 | 365 }% end of group with \indexdummies |
37713 | 366 \advancepageno |
367 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi | |
368 } | |
369 | |
370 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen | |
371 | |
372 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} | |
373 {\catcode`\@ =11 | |
374 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi | |
375 % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) | |
376 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present | |
377 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi | |
378 \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1 | |
379 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi | |
380 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} | |
381 } | |
382 | |
383 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are | |
384 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize | |
385 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) | |
386 % | |
387 \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} | |
388 \def\nstop{\vbox | |
389 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} | |
390 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} | |
391 \def\nsbot{\vbox | |
392 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} | |
393 | |
394 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of | |
395 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a | |
396 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. | |
397 % | |
69769 | 398 \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} |
399 \def\parseargusing#1#2{% | |
400 \def\argtorun{#2}% | |
37713 | 401 \begingroup |
402 \obeylines | |
69769 | 403 \spaceisspace |
404 #1% | |
405 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. | |
406 } | |
37713 | 407 |
408 {\obeylines % | |
409 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% | |
410 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. | |
69769 | 411 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% |
37713 | 412 }% |
413 } | |
414 | |
69769 | 415 % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. |
416 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} | |
417 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} | |
418 | |
419 % Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. | |
420 % | |
421 % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., | |
37713 | 422 % @end itemize @c foo |
69769 | 423 % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed |
424 % by \finishparsearg. | |
425 % | |
426 \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} | |
427 \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} | |
428 \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% | |
429 \def\temp{#3}% | |
430 \ifx\temp\empty | |
431 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: | |
432 \let\temp\finishparsearg | |
433 \else | |
434 \let\temp\argcheckspaces | |
435 \fi | |
436 % Put the space token in: | |
437 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm | |
438 } | |
439 | |
440 % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so | |
441 % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. | |
442 % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, | |
443 % just before passing the control to \argtorun. | |
444 % (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is | |
445 % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger | |
446 % that a pair of braces would be stripped. | |
447 % | |
448 % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. | |
449 % | |
450 \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} | |
451 | |
452 % \parseargdef\foo{...} | |
453 % is roughly equivalent to | |
454 % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} | |
455 % \def\Xfoo#1{...} | |
456 % | |
457 % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my | |
458 % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 | |
459 | |
460 \def\parseargdef#1{% | |
461 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% | |
462 } | |
463 \def\doparseargdef#1#2{% | |
464 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% | |
465 \def#1##1% | |
466 } | |
467 | |
468 % Several utility definitions with active space: | |
469 { | |
37713 | 470 \obeyspaces |
69769 | 471 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } |
472 | |
473 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword | |
474 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this | |
475 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input | |
476 % should produce a line of output anyway. | |
477 % | |
478 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} | |
479 | |
480 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces | |
481 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the | |
482 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). | |
483 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} | |
484 } | |
37713 | 485 |
486 | |
487 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} | |
488 | |
69769 | 489 % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: |
490 % | |
491 % \envdef\foo{...} | |
492 % \def\Efoo{...} | |
493 % | |
494 % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the | |
495 % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also | |
496 % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks | |
497 % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be | |
498 % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. | |
499 % | |
500 % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they | |
501 % are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group. (The | |
502 % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this | |
503 % special case.) | |
504 | |
505 | |
506 % At runtime, environments start with this: | |
507 \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} | |
508 % initialize | |
509 \let\thisenv\empty | |
510 | |
511 % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': | |
512 \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} | |
513 \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} | |
514 | |
515 % Check whether we're in the right environment: | |
516 \def\checkenv#1{% | |
517 \def\temp{#1}% | |
518 \ifx\thisenv\temp | |
519 \else | |
520 \badenverr | |
521 \fi | |
522 } | |
523 | |
524 % Evironment mismatch, #1 expected: | |
525 \def\badenverr{% | |
526 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
527 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, | |
528 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% | |
529 } | |
530 \def\inenvironment#1{% | |
531 \ifx#1\empty | |
532 out of any environment% | |
533 \else | |
534 in environment \expandafter\string#1% | |
535 \fi | |
536 } | |
37713 | 537 |
538 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. | |
69769 | 539 % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv |
540 % | |
541 \parseargdef\end{% | |
542 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname | |
37713 | 543 \else |
69769 | 544 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03 |
545 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname | |
546 \csname E#1\endcsname | |
547 \endgroup | |
37713 | 548 \fi |
549 } | |
550 | |
69769 | 551 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} |
552 | |
37713 | 553 |
554 %% Simple single-character @ commands | |
555 | |
556 % @@ prints an @ | |
557 % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). | |
558 \def\@{{\tt\char64}} | |
559 | |
560 % This is turned off because it was never documented | |
561 % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. | |
562 %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' | |
563 %% but suppressing ligatures. | |
564 %\def\`{{`}} | |
565 %\def\'{{'}} | |
566 | |
567 % Used to generate quoted braces. | |
568 \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} | |
569 \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} | |
570 \let\{=\mylbrace | |
571 \let\}=\myrbrace | |
572 \begingroup | |
69769 | 573 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, |
574 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. | |
575 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other | |
37713 | 576 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 |
69769 | 577 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other |
578 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% | |
579 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% | |
580 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% | |
581 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% | |
582 !endgroup | |
583 | |
584 % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. | |
585 \let\comma = , | |
37713 | 586 |
587 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent | |
69769 | 588 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. |
37713 | 589 \let\, = \c |
590 \let\dotaccent = \. | |
591 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} | |
592 \let\tieaccent = \t | |
593 \let\ubaraccent = \b | |
594 \let\udotaccent = \d | |
595 | |
69769 | 596 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm |
597 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. | |
37713 | 598 \def\questiondown{?`} |
599 \def\exclamdown{!`} | |
69769 | 600 \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} |
601 \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} | |
37713 | 602 |
603 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. | |
604 \def\imacro{i} | |
605 \def\jmacro{j} | |
606 \def\dotless#1{% | |
607 \def\temp{#1}% | |
608 \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi | |
609 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j | |
610 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% | |
611 \fi\fi | |
612 } | |
613 | |
69769 | 614 % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a |
615 % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) | |
616 % | |
617 \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } | |
618 | |
619 % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in | |
620 % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most | |
621 % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using | |
622 % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and | |
623 % \scriptscriptstyle). | |
624 % | |
625 \def\LaTeX{% | |
626 L\kern-.36em | |
627 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% | |
628 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% | |
629 \kern-.15em | |
630 \TeX | |
631 } | |
632 | |
37713 | 633 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space |
634 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space | |
635 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and | |
636 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the | |
637 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. | |
638 {\catcode`@ = 11 | |
639 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble | |
640 % if the definition is written into an index file. | |
641 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M | |
642 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } | |
643 } | |
644 | |
645 % @: forces normal size whitespace following. | |
646 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } | |
647 | |
648 % @* forces a line break. | |
649 \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} | |
650 | |
69769 | 651 % @/ allows a line break. |
652 \let\/=\allowbreak | |
653 | |
37713 | 654 % @. is an end-of-sentence period. |
69769 | 655 \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} |
37713 | 656 |
657 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. | |
69769 | 658 \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} |
37713 | 659 |
660 % @? is an end-of-sentence query. | |
69769 | 661 \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} |
662 | |
663 % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. | |
664 % | |
665 \def\onword{on} | |
666 \def\offword{off} | |
667 % | |
668 \parseargdef\frenchspacing{% | |
669 \def\temp{#1}% | |
670 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing | |
671 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing | |
672 \else | |
673 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
674 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}% | |
675 \fi\fi | |
676 } | |
37713 | 677 |
678 % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the | |
679 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would | |
680 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. | |
681 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} | |
682 | |
683 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing | |
684 % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box | |
685 % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for | |
686 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is | |
687 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, | |
688 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and | |
689 % the text is small, which looks bad. | |
690 % | |
69769 | 691 % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can |
692 % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it | |
693 % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an | |
694 % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The | |
695 % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit | |
696 % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). | |
697 % | |
698 \newbox\groupbox | |
699 \def\vfilllimit{0.7} | |
700 % | |
701 \envdef\group{% | |
702 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else | |
37713 | 703 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp |
704 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% | |
705 \fi | |
69769 | 706 \startsavinginserts |
707 % | |
708 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup | |
37713 | 709 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as |
710 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an | |
711 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after | |
712 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group | |
713 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo | |
714 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. | |
715 \comment | |
716 } | |
717 % | |
69769 | 718 % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts |
719 % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) | |
720 % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space | |
721 % above. But it's pretty close. | |
722 \def\Egroup{% | |
723 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group | |
724 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. | |
725 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. | |
726 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth | |
727 \egroup % End the \vtop. | |
728 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. | |
729 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox | |
730 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). | |
731 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal | |
732 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big | |
733 % group, force a page break. | |
734 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 | |
735 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight | |
736 \page | |
737 \fi | |
738 \fi | |
739 \box\groupbox | |
740 \prevdepth = \dimen1 | |
741 \checkinserts | |
742 } | |
743 % | |
37713 | 744 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help |
745 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. | |
746 % | |
747 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% | |
748 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% | |
749 where each line of input produces a line of output.} | |
750 | |
751 % @need space-in-mils | |
752 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. | |
753 | |
754 \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in | |
755 | |
756 % Old definition--didn't work. | |
69769 | 757 %\parseargdef\need{\par % |
37713 | 758 %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally |
759 %% if the depth of the box does not fit. | |
760 %{\baselineskip=0pt% | |
761 %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak | |
762 %\prevdepth=-1000pt | |
763 %}} | |
764 | |
69769 | 765 \parseargdef\need{% |
37713 | 766 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a |
767 % paragraph. | |
768 \par | |
769 % | |
770 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. | |
771 \dimen0 = #1\mil | |
772 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox | |
773 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox | |
774 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 | |
775 % | |
776 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the | |
777 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. | |
778 % And a page break here is fine. | |
779 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% | |
780 % | |
781 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the | |
782 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the | |
783 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider | |
784 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the | |
785 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. | |
786 % | |
787 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the | |
788 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in | |
789 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which | |
790 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing | |
791 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an | |
792 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real | |
793 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. | |
794 \penalty9999 | |
795 % | |
796 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. | |
797 \kern -#1\mil | |
798 % | |
799 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. | |
800 \nobreak | |
801 \fi | |
802 } | |
803 | |
69769 | 804 % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). |
37713 | 805 |
806 \let\br = \par | |
807 | |
69769 | 808 % @page forces the start of a new page. |
37713 | 809 % |
810 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} | |
811 | |
812 % @exdent text.... | |
813 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin | |
814 | |
815 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. | |
816 % That's how much \exdent should take out. | |
817 \newskip\exdentamount | |
818 | |
819 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. | |
69769 | 820 \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} |
37713 | 821 |
822 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. | |
69769 | 823 \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount |
824 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} | |
37713 | 825 |
826 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current | |
827 % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion | |
828 % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. | |
829 % | |
830 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm | |
831 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} | |
832 % | |
833 \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% | |
834 \nobreak | |
835 \kern-\strutdepth | |
836 \vtop to \strutdepth{% | |
837 \baselineskip=\strutdepth | |
838 \vss | |
839 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to | |
840 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. | |
841 \ifx#1l% | |
842 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% | |
843 \else | |
844 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% | |
845 \fi | |
846 \null | |
847 }% | |
848 }} | |
849 \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} | |
850 \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} | |
851 % | |
852 % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} | |
853 % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; | |
854 % else use TEXT for both). | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
855 % |
37713 | 856 \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} |
857 \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
858 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
37713 | 859 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt |
860 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts | |
861 \def\righttext{#2}% | |
862 \else | |
863 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text | |
864 \def\righttext{#1}% | |
865 \fi | |
866 % | |
867 \ifodd\pageno | |
868 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin | |
869 \else | |
870 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% | |
871 \fi | |
872 \temp | |
873 } | |
874 | |
875 % @include file insert text of that file as input. | |
69769 | 876 % |
877 \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} | |
878 \def\includezzz#1{% | |
879 \pushthisfilestack | |
37713 | 880 \def\thisfile{#1}% |
69769 | 881 {% |
882 \makevalueexpandable | |
883 \def\temp{\input #1 }% | |
884 \expandafter | |
885 }\temp | |
886 \popthisfilestack | |
887 } | |
888 \def\filenamecatcodes{% | |
889 \catcode`\\=\other | |
890 \catcode`~=\other | |
891 \catcode`^=\other | |
892 \catcode`_=\other | |
893 \catcode`|=\other | |
894 \catcode`<=\other | |
895 \catcode`>=\other | |
896 \catcode`+=\other | |
897 \catcode`-=\other | |
898 } | |
899 | |
900 \def\pushthisfilestack{% | |
901 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm | |
902 } | |
903 \def\pushthisfilestackX{% | |
904 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm | |
905 } | |
906 \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% | |
907 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% | |
908 } | |
909 | |
910 \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} | |
911 \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: | |
912 the stack of filenames is empty.}} | |
37713 | 913 |
914 \def\thisfile{} | |
915 | |
69769 | 916 % @center line |
917 % outputs that line, centered. | |
918 % | |
919 \parseargdef\center{% | |
920 \ifhmode | |
921 \let\next\centerH | |
922 \else | |
923 \let\next\centerV | |
924 \fi | |
925 \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% | |
926 } | |
927 \def\centerH#1{% | |
928 {% | |
929 \hfil\break | |
930 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip | |
931 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | |
932 \line{#1}% | |
933 \break | |
934 }% | |
935 } | |
936 \def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} | |
37713 | 937 |
938 % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space | |
939 | |
69769 | 940 \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} |
37713 | 941 |
942 % @comment ...line which is ignored... | |
943 % @c is the same as @comment | |
944 % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment | |
945 | |
946 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% | |
947 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% | |
948 \commentxxx} | |
949 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} | |
950 | |
951 \let\c=\comment | |
952 | |
953 % @paragraphindent NCHARS | |
954 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. | |
69769 | 955 % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. |
956 % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
957 % |
37713 | 958 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords |
959 \def\noneword{none} | |
960 % | |
69769 | 961 \parseargdef\paragraphindent{% |
37713 | 962 \def\temp{#1}% |
963 \ifx\temp\asisword | |
964 \else | |
965 \ifx\temp\noneword | |
966 \defaultparindent = 0pt | |
967 \else | |
968 \defaultparindent = #1em | |
969 \fi | |
970 \fi | |
971 \parindent = \defaultparindent | |
972 } | |
973 | |
974 % @exampleindent NCHARS | |
975 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. | |
976 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but | |
977 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. | |
69769 | 978 \parseargdef\exampleindent{% |
37713 | 979 \def\temp{#1}% |
980 \ifx\temp\asisword | |
981 \else | |
982 \ifx\temp\noneword | |
983 \lispnarrowing = 0pt | |
984 \else | |
985 \lispnarrowing = #1em | |
986 \fi | |
987 \fi | |
988 } | |
989 | |
69769 | 990 % @firstparagraphindent WORD |
991 % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph | |
992 % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such | |
993 % paragraphs. | |
994 % | |
995 % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling | |
996 % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. | |
997 % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. | |
998 % By default, we suppress indentation. | |
999 % | |
1000 \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
1001 \def\insertword{insert} | |
1002 % | |
1003 \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% | |
1004 \def\temp{#1}% | |
1005 \ifx\temp\noneword | |
1006 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent | |
1007 \else\ifx\temp\insertword | |
1008 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax | |
1009 \else | |
1010 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
1011 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% | |
1012 \fi\fi | |
1013 } | |
1014 | |
1015 % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to | |
1016 % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. | |
1017 % | |
1018 % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next | |
1019 % paragraph. | |
1020 % | |
1021 \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% | |
1022 \gdef\indent{% | |
1023 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
1024 \indent | |
1025 }% | |
1026 \gdef\noindent{% | |
1027 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
1028 \noindent | |
1029 }% | |
1030 \global\everypar = {% | |
1031 \kern -\parindent | |
1032 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
1033 }% | |
1034 } | |
1035 | |
1036 \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% | |
1037 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent | |
1038 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent | |
1039 \global \everypar = {}% | |
1040 } | |
1041 | |
1042 | |
37713 | 1043 % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. |
1044 % | |
1045 \def\asis#1{#1} | |
1046 | |
47284 | 1047 % @math outputs its argument in math mode. |
1048 % | |
1049 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean | |
1050 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make | |
69769 | 1051 % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, |
1052 % which is what @var uses. | |
1053 { | |
1054 \catcode`\_ = \active | |
1055 \gdef\mathunderscore{% | |
1056 \catcode`\_=\active | |
1057 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% | |
1058 } | |
1059 } | |
47284 | 1060 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. |
1061 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but | |
1062 % this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not | |
1063 % otherwise define @\. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
1064 % |
47284 | 1065 % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. |
1066 \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} | |
1067 % | |
1068 \def\math{% | |
1069 \tex | |
69769 | 1070 \mathunderscore |
47284 | 1071 \let\\ = \mathbackslash |
69769 | 1072 \mathactive |
1073 $\finishmath | |
1074 } | |
1075 \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. | |
1076 | |
1077 % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. | |
1078 % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument | |
1079 % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). | |
1080 % | |
1081 { | |
1082 \catcode`^ = \active | |
1083 \catcode`< = \active | |
1084 \catcode`> = \active | |
1085 \catcode`+ = \active | |
1086 \gdef\mathactive{% | |
1087 \let^ = \ptexhat | |
1088 \let< = \ptexless | |
1089 \let> = \ptexgtr | |
1090 \let+ = \ptexplus | |
1091 } | |
1092 } | |
37713 | 1093 |
1094 % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. | |
69769 | 1095 \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} |
1096 \def\minus{$-$} | |
1097 | |
1098 % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. | |
71093 | 1099 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm |
1100 % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, | |
1101 % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do | |
1102 % whichever is larger. | |
69769 | 1103 % |
1104 \def\dots{% | |
1105 \leavevmode | |
71093 | 1106 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods |
1107 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em | |
1108 \dimen0 = \wd0 | |
1109 \else | |
1110 \dimen0 = 1.5em | |
1111 \fi | |
1112 \hbox to \dimen0{% | |
1113 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil | |
1114 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil | |
1115 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil | |
1116 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil | |
69769 | 1117 }% |
1118 } | |
1119 | |
1120 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. | |
1121 % | |
1122 \def\enddots{% | |
1123 \dots | |
1124 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor | |
1125 } | |
1126 | |
1127 % @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up | |
1128 % Texinfo's parsing. | |
1129 % | |
1130 \let\comma = , | |
37713 | 1131 |
1132 % @refill is a no-op. | |
1133 \let\refill=\relax | |
1134 | |
1135 % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to | |
1136 % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. | |
1137 % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). | |
1138 % | |
1139 \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. | |
1140 \let\novalidate = \linksfalse | |
1141 | |
1142 % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. | |
1143 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. | |
1144 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. | |
1145 \def\setfilename{% | |
69769 | 1146 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. |
37713 | 1147 \iflinks |
69769 | 1148 \tryauxfile |
1149 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. | |
1150 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux | |
37713 | 1151 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. |
1152 \openindices | |
69769 | 1153 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. |
37713 | 1154 % |
1155 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. | |
1156 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. | |
1157 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf | |
69769 | 1158 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi |
1159 \closein 1 | |
37713 | 1160 % |
1161 \comment % Ignore the actual filename. | |
1162 } | |
1163 | |
1164 % Called from \setfilename. | |
1165 % | |
1166 \def\openindices{% | |
1167 \newindex{cp}% | |
1168 \newcodeindex{fn}% | |
1169 \newcodeindex{vr}% | |
1170 \newcodeindex{tp}% | |
1171 \newcodeindex{ky}% | |
1172 \newcodeindex{pg}% | |
1173 } | |
1174 | |
1175 % @bye. | |
1176 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} | |
1177 | |
1178 | |
1179 \message{pdf,} | |
1180 % adobe `portable' document format | |
1181 \newcount\tempnum | |
1182 \newcount\lnkcount | |
1183 \newtoks\filename | |
1184 \newcount\filenamelength | |
1185 \newcount\pgn | |
1186 \newtoks\toksA | |
1187 \newtoks\toksB | |
1188 \newtoks\toksC | |
1189 \newtoks\toksD | |
1190 \newbox\boxA | |
1191 \newcount\countA | |
1192 \newif\ifpdf | |
1193 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest | |
1194 | |
69769 | 1195 % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 |
1196 % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined, | |
1197 % borrowed from ifpdf.sty. | |
37713 | 1198 \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined |
1199 \else | |
69769 | 1200 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax |
1201 \else | |
1202 \ifcase\pdfoutput | |
1203 \else | |
1204 \pdftrue | |
1205 \fi | |
1206 \fi | |
1207 \fi | |
1208 | |
1209 % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, | |
1210 % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to | |
1211 % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be | |
1212 % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. | |
1213 % http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html | |
1214 % (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX | |
1215 % user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so | |
1216 % that's what we do). | |
1217 | |
1218 % double active backslashes. | |
1219 % | |
1220 {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active | |
1221 @gdef@activebackslashdouble{% | |
1222 @catcode`@\=@active | |
1223 @let\=@doublebackslash} | |
1224 } | |
1225 | |
1226 % To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are | |
1227 % not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as | |
77025 | 1228 % us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor |
1229 % changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission | |
1230 % from the author, Heiko Oberdiek. | |
69769 | 1231 % |
1232 % #1 is the tokens to replace. | |
1233 % #2 is the replacement. | |
1234 % #3 is the control sequence with the string. | |
1235 % | |
1236 \def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{% | |
1237 \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{% | |
1238 ##1% | |
1239 \ifx\\##2\\% | |
1240 \else | |
1241 #2% | |
1242 \HyReturnAfterFi{% | |
1243 \HyPsdReplace##2\END | |
1244 }% | |
1245 \fi | |
1246 }% | |
1247 \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}% | |
1248 } | |
1249 \long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1} | |
1250 | |
1251 % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements. | |
1252 \def\backslashparens#1{% | |
1253 \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply | |
1254 % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest. | |
1255 \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}% | |
1256 \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}% | |
1257 } | |
1258 | |
74360 | 1259 \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images |
1260 with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot | |
1261 be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI | |
1262 output) for that.)} | |
1263 | |
69769 | 1264 \ifpdf |
37713 | 1265 \input pdfcolor |
77025 | 1266 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} |
1267 % | |
70570 | 1268 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). |
37713 | 1269 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% |
70570 | 1270 \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
1271 \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% | |
74360 | 1272 % |
1273 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among | |
1274 % others). Let's try in that order. | |
1275 \let\pdfimgext=\empty | |
1276 \begingroup | |
1277 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 | |
1278 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 | |
1279 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 | |
1280 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 | |
1281 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 | |
1282 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp | |
1283 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% | |
77025 | 1284 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% |
74360 | 1285 \fi |
77025 | 1286 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% |
74360 | 1287 \fi |
77025 | 1288 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% |
74360 | 1289 \fi |
77025 | 1290 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% |
74360 | 1291 \fi |
77025 | 1292 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% |
74360 | 1293 \fi |
1294 \closein 1 | |
1295 \endgroup | |
1296 % | |
47284 | 1297 % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is |
1298 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) | |
37713 | 1299 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 |
47284 | 1300 \immediate\pdfimage |
37713 | 1301 \else |
47284 | 1302 \immediate\pdfximage |
37713 | 1303 \fi |
70570 | 1304 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi |
1305 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi | |
37713 | 1306 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 |
74360 | 1307 #1.\pdfimgext |
37713 | 1308 \else |
74360 | 1309 {#1.\pdfimgext}% |
37713 | 1310 \fi |
1311 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else | |
1312 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage | |
1313 \fi} | |
77025 | 1314 % |
69769 | 1315 \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% |
1316 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters | |
1317 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. | |
77025 | 1318 \indexnofonts |
1319 \turnoffactive | |
69769 | 1320 \activebackslashdouble |
77025 | 1321 \makevalueexpandable |
69769 | 1322 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% |
1323 \backslashparens\pdfdestname | |
77025 | 1324 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% |
1325 }} | |
69769 | 1326 % |
1327 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. | |
77025 | 1328 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} |
69769 | 1329 % |
77636 | 1330 % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as |
1331 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. | |
1332 % (Defined in pdfcolor.tex.) | |
1333 \let\urlcolor = \BrickRed | |
1334 \let\linkcolor = \BrickRed | |
37713 | 1335 \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink} |
77025 | 1336 % |
37713 | 1337 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines |
1338 % come from Petr Olsak | |
1339 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% | |
1340 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} | |
1341 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax | |
69769 | 1342 \advance\tempnum by 1 |
37713 | 1343 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} |
69769 | 1344 % |
1345 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the | |
1346 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number | |
1347 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, | |
1348 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. | |
1349 % #4 is the page number | |
1350 % | |
1351 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% | |
1352 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the | |
1353 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section | |
1354 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't | |
1355 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. | |
1356 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% | |
1357 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty | |
1358 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% | |
1359 \else | |
1360 % Doubled backslashes in the name. | |
1361 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% | |
1362 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}% | |
1363 \fi | |
1364 % | |
1365 % Also double the backslashes in the display string. | |
1366 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% | |
1367 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}% | |
1368 % | |
1369 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% | |
1370 } | |
1371 % | |
1372 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% | |
1373 \begingroup | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
1374 % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks |
37713 | 1375 \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace |
1376 \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace | |
1377 % | |
69769 | 1378 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. |
1379 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1380 \def\thischapnum{##2}% | |
1381 \def\thissecnum{0}% | |
1382 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | |
1383 }% | |
1384 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1385 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% | |
1386 \def\thissecnum{##2}% | |
1387 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | |
1388 }% | |
1389 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1390 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% | |
1391 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% | |
1392 }% | |
1393 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1394 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% | |
1395 }% | |
1396 \def\thischapnum{0}% | |
1397 \def\thissecnum{0}% | |
1398 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | |
1399 % | |
1400 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et | |
1401 % al. a second time, below. | |
1402 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% | |
1403 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% | |
1404 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% | |
1405 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% | |
1406 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% | |
1407 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% | |
1408 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% | |
1409 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% | |
1410 \readdatafile{toc}% | |
1411 % | |
1412 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. | |
1413 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of | |
1414 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. | |
1415 % | |
1416 % We use the node names as the destinations. | |
1417 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1418 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1419 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1420 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1421 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1422 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1423 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero | |
1424 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1425 % | |
1426 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of | |
1427 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, | |
1428 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from | |
1429 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from | |
1430 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. | |
1431 % | |
1432 % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to | |
1433 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right | |
1434 % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. | |
1435 \indexnofonts | |
1436 \setupdatafile | |
1437 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash | |
78048 | 1438 \input \tocreadfilename |
69769 | 1439 \endgroup |
37713 | 1440 } |
69769 | 1441 % |
37713 | 1442 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% |
1443 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax | |
1444 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces | |
1445 \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% | |
1446 \advance\filenamelength by 1 | |
1447 \fi | |
1448 \fi | |
1449 \nextsp} | |
1450 \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} | |
1451 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 | |
1452 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink | |
1453 \else | |
1454 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink | |
1455 \fi | |
69769 | 1456 % make a live url in pdf output. |
37713 | 1457 \def\pdfurl#1{% |
1458 \begingroup | |
69769 | 1459 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not |
1460 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context | |
1461 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one | |
1462 % people have actually reported a problem with. | |
1463 % | |
1464 \normalturnoffactive | |
1465 \def\@{@}% | |
1466 \let\/=\empty | |
1467 \makevalueexpandable | |
77636 | 1468 \leavevmode\urlcolor |
37713 | 1469 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% |
1470 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% | |
1471 \endgroup} | |
1472 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} | |
1473 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} | |
1474 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} | |
1475 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} | |
1476 \def\maketoks{% | |
69769 | 1477 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax |
37713 | 1478 \ifx\first0\adn0 |
1479 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 | |
1480 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
1481 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 |
37713 | 1482 \else |
1483 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi | |
1484 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else | |
1485 \let\next=\maketoks | |
1486 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} | |
1487 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi | |
1488 \fi | |
1489 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | |
1490 \next} | |
1491 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% | |
1492 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} | |
1493 \def\pdflink#1{% | |
47284 | 1494 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} |
37713 | 1495 \linkcolor #1\endlink} |
1496 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} | |
69769 | 1497 \else |
1498 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble | |
1499 \let\pdfurl = \gobble | |
1500 \let\endlink = \relax | |
1501 \let\linkcolor = \relax | |
1502 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax | |
1503 \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput | |
37713 | 1504 |
1505 | |
1506 \message{fonts,} | |
69769 | 1507 |
1508 % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. | |
1509 % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in | |
1510 % italics, not bold italics. | |
1511 % | |
1512 \def\setfontstyle#1{% | |
1513 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. | |
1514 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font | |
1515 } | |
1516 | |
1517 % Select #1 fonts with the current style. | |
1518 % | |
1519 \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} | |
1520 | |
1521 \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} | |
1522 \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} | |
1523 \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} | |
1524 \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} | |
1525 \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} | |
37713 | 1526 |
1527 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. | |
69769 | 1528 % So we set up a \sf. |
37713 | 1529 \newfam\sffam |
69769 | 1530 \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} |
37713 | 1531 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. |
1532 | |
69769 | 1533 % We don't need math for this font style. |
1534 \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} | |
37713 | 1535 |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1536 |
47284 | 1537 % Default leading. |
1538 \newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt | |
1539 | |
1540 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size | |
1541 % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers | |
1542 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. | |
1543 % | |
1544 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} | |
1545 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} | |
1546 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} | |
1547 % | |
1548 \def\setleading#1{% | |
1549 \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax | |
1550 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip | |
1551 \normalbaselines | |
1552 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% | |
1553 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip | |
1554 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip | |
1555 }% | |
1556 } | |
37713 | 1557 |
77636 | 1558 % |
1559 % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. | |
1560 % | |
1561 % \cmapOT1 | |
1562 \ifpdf | |
1563 \begingroup | |
1564 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. | |
1565 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap | |
1566 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) | |
1567 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) | |
1568 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) | |
1569 %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) | |
1570 %%Version: 1.000 | |
1571 %%EndComments | |
1572 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin | |
1573 12 dict begin | |
1574 begincmap | |
1575 /CIDSystemInfo | |
1576 << /Registry (TeX) | |
1577 /Ordering (OT1) | |
1578 /Supplement 0 | |
1579 >> def | |
1580 /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def | |
1581 /CMapType 2 def | |
1582 1 begincodespacerange | |
1583 <00> <7F> | |
1584 endcodespacerange | |
1585 8 beginbfrange | |
1586 <00> <01> <0393> | |
1587 <09> <0A> <03A8> | |
1588 <23> <26> <0023> | |
1589 <28> <3B> <0028> | |
1590 <3F> <5B> <003F> | |
1591 <5D> <5E> <005D> | |
1592 <61> <7A> <0061> | |
1593 <7B> <7C> <2013> | |
1594 endbfrange | |
1595 40 beginbfchar | |
1596 <02> <0398> | |
1597 <03> <039B> | |
1598 <04> <039E> | |
1599 <05> <03A0> | |
1600 <06> <03A3> | |
1601 <07> <03D2> | |
1602 <08> <03A6> | |
1603 <0B> <00660066> | |
1604 <0C> <00660069> | |
1605 <0D> <0066006C> | |
1606 <0E> <006600660069> | |
1607 <0F> <00660066006C> | |
1608 <10> <0131> | |
1609 <11> <0237> | |
1610 <12> <0060> | |
1611 <13> <00B4> | |
1612 <14> <02C7> | |
1613 <15> <02D8> | |
1614 <16> <00AF> | |
1615 <17> <02DA> | |
1616 <18> <00B8> | |
1617 <19> <00DF> | |
1618 <1A> <00E6> | |
1619 <1B> <0153> | |
1620 <1C> <00F8> | |
1621 <1D> <00C6> | |
1622 <1E> <0152> | |
1623 <1F> <00D8> | |
1624 <21> <0021> | |
1625 <22> <201D> | |
1626 <27> <2019> | |
1627 <3C> <00A1> | |
1628 <3D> <003D> | |
1629 <3E> <00BF> | |
1630 <5C> <201C> | |
1631 <5F> <02D9> | |
1632 <60> <2018> | |
1633 <7D> <02DD> | |
1634 <7E> <007E> | |
1635 <7F> <00A8> | |
1636 endbfchar | |
1637 endcmap | |
1638 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop | |
1639 end | |
1640 end | |
1641 %%EndResource | |
1642 %%EOF | |
1643 }\endgroup | |
1644 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% | |
1645 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% | |
1646 }% | |
1647 % | |
1648 % \cmapOT1IT | |
1649 \begingroup | |
1650 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. | |
1651 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap | |
1652 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) | |
1653 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) | |
1654 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) | |
1655 %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) | |
1656 %%Version: 1.000 | |
1657 %%EndComments | |
1658 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin | |
1659 12 dict begin | |
1660 begincmap | |
1661 /CIDSystemInfo | |
1662 << /Registry (TeX) | |
1663 /Ordering (OT1IT) | |
1664 /Supplement 0 | |
1665 >> def | |
1666 /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def | |
1667 /CMapType 2 def | |
1668 1 begincodespacerange | |
1669 <00> <7F> | |
1670 endcodespacerange | |
1671 8 beginbfrange | |
1672 <00> <01> <0393> | |
1673 <09> <0A> <03A8> | |
1674 <25> <26> <0025> | |
1675 <28> <3B> <0028> | |
1676 <3F> <5B> <003F> | |
1677 <5D> <5E> <005D> | |
1678 <61> <7A> <0061> | |
1679 <7B> <7C> <2013> | |
1680 endbfrange | |
1681 42 beginbfchar | |
1682 <02> <0398> | |
1683 <03> <039B> | |
1684 <04> <039E> | |
1685 <05> <03A0> | |
1686 <06> <03A3> | |
1687 <07> <03D2> | |
1688 <08> <03A6> | |
1689 <0B> <00660066> | |
1690 <0C> <00660069> | |
1691 <0D> <0066006C> | |
1692 <0E> <006600660069> | |
1693 <0F> <00660066006C> | |
1694 <10> <0131> | |
1695 <11> <0237> | |
1696 <12> <0060> | |
1697 <13> <00B4> | |
1698 <14> <02C7> | |
1699 <15> <02D8> | |
1700 <16> <00AF> | |
1701 <17> <02DA> | |
1702 <18> <00B8> | |
1703 <19> <00DF> | |
1704 <1A> <00E6> | |
1705 <1B> <0153> | |
1706 <1C> <00F8> | |
1707 <1D> <00C6> | |
1708 <1E> <0152> | |
1709 <1F> <00D8> | |
1710 <21> <0021> | |
1711 <22> <201D> | |
1712 <23> <0023> | |
1713 <24> <00A3> | |
1714 <27> <2019> | |
1715 <3C> <00A1> | |
1716 <3D> <003D> | |
1717 <3E> <00BF> | |
1718 <5C> <201C> | |
1719 <5F> <02D9> | |
1720 <60> <2018> | |
1721 <7D> <02DD> | |
1722 <7E> <007E> | |
1723 <7F> <00A8> | |
1724 endbfchar | |
1725 endcmap | |
1726 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop | |
1727 end | |
1728 end | |
1729 %%EndResource | |
1730 %%EOF | |
1731 }\endgroup | |
1732 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% | |
1733 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% | |
1734 }% | |
1735 % | |
1736 % \cmapOT1TT | |
1737 \begingroup | |
1738 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. | |
1739 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap | |
1740 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) | |
1741 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) | |
1742 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) | |
1743 %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) | |
1744 %%Version: 1.000 | |
1745 %%EndComments | |
1746 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin | |
1747 12 dict begin | |
1748 begincmap | |
1749 /CIDSystemInfo | |
1750 << /Registry (TeX) | |
1751 /Ordering (OT1TT) | |
1752 /Supplement 0 | |
1753 >> def | |
1754 /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def | |
1755 /CMapType 2 def | |
1756 1 begincodespacerange | |
1757 <00> <7F> | |
1758 endcodespacerange | |
1759 5 beginbfrange | |
1760 <00> <01> <0393> | |
1761 <09> <0A> <03A8> | |
1762 <21> <26> <0021> | |
1763 <28> <5F> <0028> | |
1764 <61> <7E> <0061> | |
1765 endbfrange | |
1766 32 beginbfchar | |
1767 <02> <0398> | |
1768 <03> <039B> | |
1769 <04> <039E> | |
1770 <05> <03A0> | |
1771 <06> <03A3> | |
1772 <07> <03D2> | |
1773 <08> <03A6> | |
1774 <0B> <2191> | |
1775 <0C> <2193> | |
1776 <0D> <0027> | |
1777 <0E> <00A1> | |
1778 <0F> <00BF> | |
1779 <10> <0131> | |
1780 <11> <0237> | |
1781 <12> <0060> | |
1782 <13> <00B4> | |
1783 <14> <02C7> | |
1784 <15> <02D8> | |
1785 <16> <00AF> | |
1786 <17> <02DA> | |
1787 <18> <00B8> | |
1788 <19> <00DF> | |
1789 <1A> <00E6> | |
1790 <1B> <0153> | |
1791 <1C> <00F8> | |
1792 <1D> <00C6> | |
1793 <1E> <0152> | |
1794 <1F> <00D8> | |
1795 <20> <2423> | |
1796 <27> <2019> | |
1797 <60> <2018> | |
1798 <7F> <00A8> | |
1799 endbfchar | |
1800 endcmap | |
1801 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop | |
1802 end | |
1803 end | |
1804 %%EndResource | |
1805 %%EOF | |
1806 }\endgroup | |
1807 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% | |
1808 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% | |
1809 }% | |
1810 \else | |
1811 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble | |
1812 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble | |
1813 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble | |
1814 \fi | |
1815 | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1816 |
37713 | 1817 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the |
1818 % specified font prefix (normally `cm'). | |
77636 | 1819 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap |
1820 % encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass | |
1821 % empty to omit). | |
1822 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% | |
1823 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 | |
1824 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% | |
1825 } | |
1826 % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. | |
1827 \let\cmap\gobble | |
37713 | 1828 |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1829 |
37713 | 1830 % Use cm as the default font prefix. |
1831 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix | |
1832 % before you read in texinfo.tex. | |
1833 \ifx\fontprefix\undefined | |
1834 \def\fontprefix{cm} | |
1835 \fi | |
1836 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. | |
1837 \def\rmshape{r} | |
1838 \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold | |
1839 \def\bfshape{b} | |
1840 \def\bxshape{bx} | |
1841 \def\ttshape{tt} | |
1842 \def\ttbshape{tt} | |
1843 \def\ttslshape{sltt} | |
1844 \def\itshape{ti} | |
1845 \def\itbshape{bxti} | |
1846 \def\slshape{sl} | |
1847 \def\slbshape{bxsl} | |
1848 \def\sfshape{ss} | |
1849 \def\sfbshape{ss} | |
1850 \def\scshape{csc} | |
1851 \def\scbshape{csc} | |
1852 | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1853 % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1854 % Texinfo. |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1855 % |
77025 | 1856 \def\definetextfontsizexi{% |
69769 | 1857 % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). |
1858 \def\textnominalsize{11pt} | |
1859 \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} | |
77636 | 1860 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
1861 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} | |
1862 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
1863 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} | |
1864 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
1865 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
1866 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
1867 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} | |
37713 | 1868 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep |
1869 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep | |
1870 | |
69769 | 1871 % A few fonts for @defun names and args. |
77636 | 1872 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
1873 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} | |
1874 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} | |
69769 | 1875 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} |
37713 | 1876 |
1877 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). | |
69769 | 1878 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} |
77636 | 1879 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
1880 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
1881 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} | |
1882 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} | |
1883 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | |
1884 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | |
1885 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} | |
1886 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} | |
37713 | 1887 \font\smalli=cmmi9 |
1888 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 | |
1889 | |
47284 | 1890 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). |
69769 | 1891 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} |
77636 | 1892 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
1893 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
1894 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} | |
1895 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} | |
1896 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | |
1897 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | |
1898 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} | |
1899 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} | |
47284 | 1900 \font\smalleri=cmmi8 |
1901 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 | |
1902 | |
69769 | 1903 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): |
1904 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} | |
77636 | 1905 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} |
1906 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} | |
1907 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} | |
1908 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} | |
1909 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} | |
1910 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} | |
37713 | 1911 \let\titlebf=\titlerm |
77636 | 1912 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} |
37713 | 1913 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 |
1914 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 | |
1915 \def\authorrm{\secrm} | |
69769 | 1916 \def\authortt{\sectt} |
37713 | 1917 |
1918 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). | |
69769 | 1919 \def\chapnominalsize{17pt} |
77636 | 1920 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} |
1921 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} | |
1922 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} | |
1923 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} | |
1924 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} | |
1925 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} | |
37713 | 1926 \let\chapbf=\chaprm |
77636 | 1927 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} |
37713 | 1928 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 |
1929 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 | |
1930 | |
1931 % Section fonts (14.4pt). | |
69769 | 1932 \def\secnominalsize{14pt} |
77636 | 1933 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
1934 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} | |
1935 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} | |
1936 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} | |
1937 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} | |
1938 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} | |
37713 | 1939 \let\secbf\secrm |
77636 | 1940 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} |
37713 | 1941 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 |
1942 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 | |
1943 | |
1944 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). | |
69769 | 1945 \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} |
77636 | 1946 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} |
1947 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} | |
1948 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} | |
1949 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} | |
1950 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} | |
1951 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} | |
37713 | 1952 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm |
77636 | 1953 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} |
37713 | 1954 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf |
1955 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 | |
69769 | 1956 |
1957 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). | |
1958 \def\reducednominalsize{10pt} | |
77636 | 1959 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
1960 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
1961 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | |
1962 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} | |
1963 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | |
1964 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | |
1965 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | |
1966 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
69769 | 1967 \font\reducedi=cmmi10 |
1968 \font\reducedsy=cmsy10 | |
37713 | 1969 |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1970 % reset the current fonts |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1971 \textfonts |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1972 \rm |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1973 } % end of 11pt text font size definitions |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1974 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1975 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1976 % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1977 % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1978 % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1979 % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1980 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1981 \def\definetextfontsizex{% |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1982 % Text fonts (10pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1983 \def\textnominalsize{10pt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1984 \edef\mainmagstep{1000} |
77636 | 1985 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
1986 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} | |
1987 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
1988 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} | |
1989 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
1990 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
1991 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | |
1992 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1993 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1994 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1995 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
1996 % A few fonts for @defun names and args. |
77636 | 1997 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} |
1998 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} | |
1999 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2000 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2001 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2002 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2003 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} |
77636 | 2004 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
2005 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2006 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} | |
2007 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} | |
2008 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | |
2009 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | |
2010 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} | |
2011 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2012 \font\smalli=cmmi9 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2013 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2014 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2015 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2016 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} |
77636 | 2017 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
2018 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2019 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} | |
2020 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} | |
2021 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | |
2022 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | |
2023 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} | |
2024 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2025 \font\smalleri=cmmi8 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2026 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2027 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2028 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2029 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} |
77636 | 2030 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} |
2031 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} | |
2032 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} | |
2033 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} | |
2034 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} | |
2035 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2036 \let\titlebf=\titlerm |
77636 | 2037 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2038 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2039 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2040 \def\authorrm{\secrm} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2041 \def\authortt{\sectt} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2042 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2043 % Chapter fonts (14.4pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2044 \def\chapnominalsize{14pt} |
77636 | 2045 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
2046 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} | |
2047 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} | |
2048 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} | |
2049 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} | |
2050 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2051 \let\chapbf\chaprm |
77636 | 2052 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2053 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2054 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2055 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2056 % Section fonts (12pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2057 \def\secnominalsize{12pt} |
77636 | 2058 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} |
2059 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} | |
2060 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} | |
2061 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2062 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} | |
2063 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2064 \let\secbf\secrm |
77636 | 2065 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2066 \font\seci=cmmi12 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2067 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2068 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2069 % Subsection fonts (10pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2070 \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} |
77636 | 2071 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
2072 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} | |
2073 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | |
2074 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2075 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2076 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2077 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm |
77636 | 2078 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2079 \font\sseci=cmmi10 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2080 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2081 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2082 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2083 \def\reducednominalsize{9pt} |
77636 | 2084 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
2085 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
2086 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} | |
2087 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} | |
2088 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | |
2089 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | |
2090 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} | |
2091 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2092 \font\reducedi=cmmi9 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2093 \font\reducedsy=cmsy9 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2094 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2095 % reduce space between paragraphs |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2096 \divide\parskip by 2 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2097 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2098 % reset the current fonts |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2099 \textfonts |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2100 \rm |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2101 } % end of 10pt text font size definitions |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2102 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2103 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2104 % We provide the user-level command |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2105 % @fonttextsize 10 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2106 % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2107 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2108 \def\xword{10} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2109 \def\xiword{11} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2110 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2111 \parseargdef\fonttextsize{% |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2112 \def\textsizearg{#1}% |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2113 \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2114 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2115 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2116 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2117 % |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2118 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2119 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2120 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2121 \else |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2122 \errhelp=\EMsimple |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2123 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2124 \fi\fi |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2125 \endgroup |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2126 } |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2127 |
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2128 |
37713 | 2129 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, |
2130 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since | |
47284 | 2131 % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except |
2132 % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and | |
2133 % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). | |
37713 | 2134 % |
2135 \def\resetmathfonts{% | |
47284 | 2136 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy |
2137 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf | |
2138 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf | |
2139 } | |
37713 | 2140 |
2141 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead | |
69769 | 2142 % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the |
2143 % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire | |
2144 % \tenSTYLE to set the current font. | |
2145 % | |
2146 % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) | |
2147 % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in | |
2148 % the LaTeX logo and acronyms. | |
2149 % | |
2150 % This all needs generalizing, badly. | |
2151 % | |
37713 | 2152 \def\textfonts{% |
2153 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl | |
2154 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc | |
69769 | 2155 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy |
2156 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl | |
2157 \def\curfontsize{text}% | |
2158 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
47284 | 2159 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} |
37713 | 2160 \def\titlefonts{% |
2161 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl | |
2162 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc | |
2163 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy | |
2164 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl | |
69769 | 2165 \def\curfontsize{title}% |
2166 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% | |
37713 | 2167 \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} |
2168 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} | |
2169 \def\chapfonts{% | |
2170 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl | |
2171 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc | |
69769 | 2172 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy |
2173 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl | |
2174 \def\curfontsize{chap}% | |
2175 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% | |
37713 | 2176 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} |
2177 \def\secfonts{% | |
2178 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl | |
2179 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc | |
69769 | 2180 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy |
2181 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl | |
2182 \def\curfontsize{sec}% | |
2183 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% | |
37713 | 2184 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} |
2185 \def\subsecfonts{% | |
2186 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl | |
2187 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc | |
69769 | 2188 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy |
2189 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl | |
2190 \def\curfontsize{ssec}% | |
2191 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% | |
37713 | 2192 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} |
69769 | 2193 \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts |
2194 \def\reducedfonts{% | |
2195 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl | |
2196 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc | |
2197 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy | |
2198 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl | |
2199 \def\curfontsize{reduced}% | |
2200 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
2201 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} | |
37713 | 2202 \def\smallfonts{% |
2203 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl | |
2204 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc | |
2205 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy | |
2206 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl | |
69769 | 2207 \def\curfontsize{small}% |
2208 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
47284 | 2209 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} |
2210 \def\smallerfonts{% | |
2211 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl | |
2212 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc | |
2213 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy | |
2214 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl | |
69769 | 2215 \def\curfontsize{smaller}% |
2216 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | |
47284 | 2217 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} |
69769 | 2218 |
2219 % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. | |
2220 \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts | |
2221 | |
2222 % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample | |
2223 % can fit this many characters: | |
2224 % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 | |
2225 % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: | |
2226 % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 | |
2227 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth | |
2228 % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. | |
2229 % | |
2230 % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): | |
2231 % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 | |
2232 % | |
2233 % I wish the USA used A4 paper. | |
2234 % --karl, 24jan03. | |
2235 | |
37713 | 2236 |
2237 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. | |
2238 % | |
70407
0c8d6310fd45
reduce body text size for emacs manual to 10pt
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
69769
diff
changeset
|
2239 \definetextfontsizexi |
37713 | 2240 |
2241 % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. | |
2242 \def\angleleft{$\langle$} | |
2243 \def\angleright{$\rangle$} | |
2244 | |
2245 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks | |
2246 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 | |
2247 | |
2248 % Fonts for short table of contents. | |
77636 | 2249 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} |
2250 \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 | |
2251 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} | |
2252 \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} | |
37713 | 2253 |
2254 %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans | |
2255 %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic | |
2256 | |
2257 % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction | |
2258 % unless the following character is such as not to need one. | |
69769 | 2259 \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else |
2260 \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} | |
2261 \def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
2262 \def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
2263 | |
2264 % like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. | |
2265 % @var is set to this for defun arguments. | |
2266 \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
2267 | |
2268 % like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want | |
2269 % ttsl for book titles, do we? | |
2270 \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
37713 | 2271 |
2272 \let\i=\smartitalic | |
69769 | 2273 \let\slanted=\smartslanted |
37713 | 2274 \let\var=\smartslanted |
2275 \let\dfn=\smartslanted | |
2276 \let\emph=\smartitalic | |
69769 | 2277 |
2278 % @b, explicit bold. | |
37713 | 2279 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} |
2280 \let\strong=\b | |
2281 | |
69769 | 2282 % @sansserif, explicit sans. |
2283 \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} | |
2284 | |
37713 | 2285 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at |
2286 % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the | |
2287 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. | |
2288 % | |
2289 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} | |
2290 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } | |
2291 | |
69769 | 2292 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. |
2293 % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and | |
2294 % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. | |
2295 % | |
2296 \catcode`@=11 | |
2297 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% | |
2298 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m | |
2299 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m | |
2300 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends | |
2301 } | |
2302 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% | |
2303 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 | |
2304 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 | |
2305 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends | |
2306 } | |
2307 \catcode`@=\other | |
2308 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default | |
2309 | |
37713 | 2310 \def\t#1{% |
69769 | 2311 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% |
37713 | 2312 \null |
2313 } | |
2314 \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} | |
77636 | 2315 \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
37713 | 2316 \font\keysy=cmsy9 |
2317 \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% | |
2318 \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% | |
2319 \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt | |
2320 \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% | |
2321 \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% | |
2322 \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} | |
74360 | 2323 \def\key #1{{\nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} |
37713 | 2324 % The old definition, with no lozenge: |
2325 %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} | |
2326 \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} | |
2327 | |
2328 % @file, @option are the same as @samp. | |
2329 \let\file=\samp | |
2330 \let\option=\samp | |
2331 | |
2332 % @code is a modification of @t, | |
2333 % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. | |
2334 \def\tclose#1{% | |
2335 {% | |
2336 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. | |
2337 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font | |
2338 % | |
2339 % Switch to typewriter. | |
2340 \tt | |
2341 % | |
2342 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. | |
2343 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% | |
2344 % | |
2345 % Turn off hyphenation. | |
2346 \nohyphenation | |
2347 % | |
2348 \rawbackslash | |
69769 | 2349 \plainfrenchspacing |
37713 | 2350 #1% |
2351 }% | |
2352 \null | |
2353 } | |
2354 | |
69769 | 2355 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. |
37713 | 2356 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes |
2357 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. | |
2358 | |
2359 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control | |
2360 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. | |
2361 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) | |
2362 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. | |
2363 % -- rms. | |
2364 { | |
74360 | 2365 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active |
2366 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active | |
37713 | 2367 % |
2368 \global\def\code{\begingroup | |
74360 | 2369 \catcode\rquoteChar=\active \catcode\lquoteChar=\active |
2370 \let'\codequoteright \let`\codequoteleft | |
2371 % | |
2372 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active | |
69769 | 2373 \ifallowcodebreaks |
2374 \let-\codedash | |
2375 \let_\codeunder | |
2376 \else | |
2377 \let-\realdash | |
2378 \let_\realunder | |
2379 \fi | |
37713 | 2380 \codex |
2381 } | |
2382 } | |
2383 | |
2384 \def\realdash{-} | |
2385 \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} | |
47284 | 2386 \def\codeunder{% |
2387 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ | |
2388 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) | |
2389 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us | |
2390 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. | |
2391 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode | |
2392 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. | |
2393 \else\normalunderscore \fi | |
2394 \discretionary{}{}{}}% | |
2395 {\_}% | |
2396 } | |
37713 | 2397 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} |
2398 | |
69769 | 2399 % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., |
2400 % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in | |
2401 % some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in | |
2402 % general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this. | |
2403 % | |
2404 \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue | |
2405 | |
2406 \def\keywordtrue{true} | |
2407 \def\keywordfalse{false} | |
2408 | |
2409 \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% | |
2410 \def\txiarg{#1}% | |
2411 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue | |
2412 \allowcodebreakstrue | |
2413 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse | |
2414 \allowcodebreaksfalse | |
2415 \else | |
2416 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
2417 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}% | |
2418 \fi\fi | |
2419 } | |
2420 | |
37713 | 2421 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, |
2422 % then @kbd has no effect. | |
2423 | |
2424 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), | |
2425 % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), | |
2426 % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). | |
69769 | 2427 \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% |
2428 \def\txiarg{#1}% | |
2429 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct | |
37713 | 2430 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% |
69769 | 2431 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample |
37713 | 2432 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% |
69769 | 2433 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode |
37713 | 2434 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% |
69769 | 2435 \else |
2436 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
2437 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}% | |
37713 | 2438 \fi\fi\fi |
2439 } | |
2440 \def\worddistinct{distinct} | |
2441 \def\wordexample{example} | |
2442 \def\wordcode{code} | |
2443 | |
69769 | 2444 % Default is `distinct.' |
2445 \kbdinputstyle distinct | |
37713 | 2446 |
2447 \def\xkey{\key} | |
2448 \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% | |
2449 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% | |
2450 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi | |
2451 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} | |
2452 | |
69769 | 2453 % For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. |
2454 \let\indicateurl=\code | |
37713 | 2455 \let\env=\code |
2456 \let\command=\code | |
2457 | |
2458 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) | |
2459 % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third | |
2460 % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url | |
2461 % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in | |
2462 % a hypertex \special here. | |
2463 % | |
2464 \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} | |
2465 \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup | |
2466 \unsepspaces | |
2467 \pdfurl{#1}% | |
2468 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% | |
2469 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | |
2470 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that | |
2471 \else | |
2472 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | |
2473 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | |
2474 \ifpdf | |
2475 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it | |
2476 \else | |
2477 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url | |
2478 \fi | |
2479 \else | |
2480 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it | |
2481 \fi | |
2482 \fi | |
2483 \endlink | |
2484 \endgroup} | |
2485 | |
69769 | 2486 % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. |
2487 % | |
2488 \let\url=\uref | |
2489 | |
37713 | 2490 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. |
2491 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
2492 % |
37713 | 2493 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} |
2494 \ifpdf | |
2495 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} | |
2496 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup | |
2497 \unsepspaces | |
2498 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% | |
2499 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | |
2500 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi | |
2501 \endlink | |
2502 \endgroup} | |
2503 \else | |
2504 \let\email=\uref | |
2505 \fi | |
2506 | |
2507 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the | |
2508 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and | |
2509 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have | |
2510 % this property, we can check that font parameter. | |
2511 % | |
2512 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } | |
2513 | |
2514 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the | |
2515 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. | |
2516 % | |
2517 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} | |
2518 | |
2519 \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} | |
2520 | |
2521 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', | |
2522 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for | |
2523 % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. | |
2524 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} | |
2525 | |
2526 % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. | |
2527 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font | |
2528 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font | |
2529 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font | |
2530 | |
69769 | 2531 % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. |
2532 % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for | |
2533 % all-uppercase. | |
2534 % | |
2535 \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} | |
2536 \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% | |
2537 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% | |
2538 \def\temp{#2}% | |
2539 \ifx\temp\empty \else | |
2540 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% | |
2541 \fi | |
2542 } | |
2543 | |
2544 % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. | |
2545 % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. | |
2546 % | |
2547 \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} | |
2548 \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% | |
2549 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% | |
2550 \def\temp{#2}% | |
2551 \ifx\temp\empty \else | |
2552 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% | |
2553 \fi | |
2554 } | |
2555 | |
2556 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. | |
2557 % | |
37713 | 2558 \def\pounds{{\it\$}} |
2559 | |
69769 | 2560 % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. |
2561 % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik | |
2562 % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and | |
2563 % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). | |
2564 % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. | |
2565 % | |
2566 % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore | |
2567 % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular | |
2568 % font height. | |
2569 % | |
2570 % feymr - regular | |
2571 % feymo - slanted | |
2572 % feybr - bold | |
2573 % feybo - bold slanted | |
2574 % | |
2575 % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. | |
2576 % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. | |
2577 % Hmm. | |
2578 % | |
2579 % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? | |
2580 % Hope not. | |
2581 % | |
2582 % | |
2583 \def\euro{{\eurofont e}} | |
2584 \def\eurofont{% | |
2585 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in | |
2586 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that | |
2587 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the | |
2588 % font installed. | |
2589 % | |
2590 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale | |
2591 % that to the current nominal size. | |
2592 % | |
2593 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but | |
2594 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. | |
2595 % | |
2596 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% | |
2597 % | |
2598 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename | |
2599 % bold: | |
2600 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize | |
2601 \else | |
2602 % regular: | |
2603 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize | |
2604 \fi | |
2605 \thiseurofont | |
2606 } | |
2607 | |
2608 % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really | |
2609 % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. | |
2610 % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. | |
2611 % | |
2612 \def\registeredsymbol{% | |
2613 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% | |
2614 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% | |
2615 }$% | |
2616 } | |
2617 | |
73178 | 2618 % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. |
2619 % | |
2620 \def\textdegree{$^\circ$} | |
2621 | |
69769 | 2622 % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: |
2623 % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 | |
2624 % so we'll define it if necessary. | |
2625 % | |
2626 \ifx\Orb\undefined | |
2627 \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} | |
2628 \fi | |
2629 | |
37713 | 2630 |
2631 \message{page headings,} | |
2632 | |
2633 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in | |
2634 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc | |
2635 | |
2636 % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. | |
2637 \newif\ifseenauthor | |
2638 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage | |
2639 | |
2640 % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the | |
2641 % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. | |
2642 % | |
2643 \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2644 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | |
2645 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2646 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | |
2647 | |
69769 | 2648 \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% |
37713 | 2649 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} |
2650 | |
69769 | 2651 \envdef\titlepage{% |
2652 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. | |
2653 \begingroup | |
2654 \parindent=0pt \textfonts | |
2655 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. | |
2656 \vglue\titlepagetopglue | |
2657 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. | |
2658 \finishedtitlepagetrue | |
2659 % | |
2660 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space | |
2661 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. | |
2662 \let\oldpage = \page | |
2663 \def\page{% | |
37713 | 2664 \iffinishedtitlepage\else |
69769 | 2665 \finishtitlepage |
37713 | 2666 \fi |
2667 \let\page = \oldpage | |
69769 | 2668 \page |
2669 \null | |
2670 }% | |
37713 | 2671 } |
2672 | |
2673 \def\Etitlepage{% | |
69769 | 2674 \iffinishedtitlepage\else |
2675 \finishtitlepage | |
2676 \fi | |
2677 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, | |
2678 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. | |
2679 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page | |
2680 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. | |
2681 \oldpage | |
2682 \endgroup | |
2683 % | |
2684 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are | |
2685 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. | |
2686 \HEADINGSon | |
2687 % | |
2688 % If they want short, they certainly want long too. | |
2689 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2690 \shortcontents | |
2691 \contents | |
2692 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | |
2693 \global\let\contents = \relax | |
2694 \fi | |
2695 % | |
2696 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2697 \contents | |
2698 \global\let\contents = \relax | |
2699 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | |
2700 \fi | |
37713 | 2701 } |
2702 | |
2703 \def\finishtitlepage{% | |
69769 | 2704 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize |
2705 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue | |
2706 \finishedtitlepagetrue | |
2707 } | |
2708 | |
2709 %%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: | |
2710 | |
2711 \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm | |
2712 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} | |
2713 | |
2714 \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines | |
2715 \let\tt=\authortt} | |
2716 | |
2717 \parseargdef\title{% | |
2718 \checkenv\titlepage | |
2719 \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1} | |
2720 % print a rule at the page bottom also. | |
2721 \finishedtitlepagefalse | |
2722 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt | |
2723 } | |
2724 | |
2725 \parseargdef\subtitle{% | |
2726 \checkenv\titlepage | |
2727 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% | |
2728 } | |
2729 | |
2730 % @author should come last, but may come many times. | |
2731 % It can also be used inside @quotation. | |
2732 % | |
2733 \parseargdef\author{% | |
2734 \def\temp{\quotation}% | |
2735 \ifx\thisenv\temp | |
2736 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. | |
2737 \else | |
2738 \checkenv\titlepage | |
2739 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi | |
2740 {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}% | |
2741 \fi | |
2742 } | |
2743 | |
37713 | 2744 |
2745 %%% Set up page headings and footings. | |
2746 | |
2747 \let\thispage=\folio | |
2748 | |
2749 \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages | |
2750 \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages | |
2751 \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages | |
2752 \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages | |
2753 | |
69769 | 2754 % Now make TeX use those variables |
37713 | 2755 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline |
2756 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} | |
2757 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline | |
2758 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} | |
2759 \let\HEADINGShook=\relax | |
2760 | |
2761 % Commands to set those variables. | |
2762 % For example, this is what @headings on does | |
2763 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter | |
2764 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle | |
2765 % @evenfooting @thisfile|| | |
2766 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile | |
2767 | |
69769 | 2768 |
37713 | 2769 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} |
69769 | 2770 \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
2771 \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
2772 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | |
2773 | |
37713 | 2774 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} |
69769 | 2775 \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
2776 \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
2777 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | |
2778 | |
2779 \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% | |
37713 | 2780 |
2781 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} | |
69769 | 2782 \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
2783 \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
2784 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | |
2785 | |
37713 | 2786 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} |
69769 | 2787 \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
2788 \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
37713 | 2789 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% |
2790 % | |
2791 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume | |
2792 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. | |
72317 | 2793 \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt |
2794 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt | |
37713 | 2795 } |
2796 | |
69769 | 2797 \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} |
2798 | |
37713 | 2799 |
2800 % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. | |
2801 % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. | |
2802 % @headings off turns them off. | |
2803 % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. | |
2804 % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. | |
2805 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. | |
2806 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. | |
2807 % By default, they are off at the start of a document, | |
2808 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. | |
2809 | |
2810 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} | |
2811 | |
69769 | 2812 \def\HEADINGSoff{% |
37713 | 2813 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
2814 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} | |
2815 \HEADINGSoff | |
2816 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. | |
2817 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, | |
2818 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document | |
2819 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top | |
2820 % edge of all pages. | |
69769 | 2821 \def\HEADINGSdouble{% |
37713 | 2822 \global\pageno=1 |
2823 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2824 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2825 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | |
2826 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2827 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | |
2828 } | |
2829 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
2830 | |
2831 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, | |
2832 % page number on top right. | |
69769 | 2833 \def\HEADINGSsingle{% |
37713 | 2834 \global\pageno=1 |
2835 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2836 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2837 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2838 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2839 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
2840 } | |
2841 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} | |
2842 | |
2843 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} | |
2844 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter | |
2845 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% | |
2846 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2847 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2848 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | |
2849 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2850 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | |
2851 } | |
2852 | |
2853 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} | |
2854 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% | |
2855 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2856 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2857 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2858 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2859 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
2860 } | |
2861 | |
2862 % Subroutines used in generating headings | |
2863 % This produces Day Month Year style of output. | |
2864 % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set | |
2865 % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). | |
2866 \ifx\today\undefined | |
2867 \def\today{% | |
2868 \number\day\space | |
2869 \ifcase\month | |
2870 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr | |
2871 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug | |
2872 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec | |
2873 \fi | |
2874 \space\number\year} | |
2875 \fi | |
2876 | |
2877 % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. | |
2878 % It generates no output of its own. | |
2879 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} | |
69769 | 2880 \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} |
37713 | 2881 |
2882 | |
2883 \message{tables,} | |
69769 | 2884 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). |
37713 | 2885 |
2886 % default indentation of table text | |
2887 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in | |
2888 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text | |
2889 \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in | |
2890 % margin between end of table item and start of table text. | |
2891 \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in | |
2892 | |
2893 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin | |
2894 \newdimen\itemmax | |
2895 | |
69769 | 2896 % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with |
37713 | 2897 % these defs. |
2898 % They also define \itemindex | |
2899 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). | |
2900 | |
2901 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip | |
2902 | |
2903 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} | |
2904 | |
2905 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} | |
2906 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} | |
2907 | |
2908 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % | |
2909 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | |
2910 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent | |
69769 | 2911 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% |
37713 | 2912 \itemindex{#1}% |
2913 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. | |
2914 % | |
2915 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line | |
2916 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that | |
2917 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next | |
2918 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the | |
2919 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. | |
2920 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax | |
2921 % | |
2922 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, | |
2923 % but leave it ragged-right. | |
2924 \begingroup | |
2925 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent | |
2926 \advance\hsize by\tableindent | |
2927 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil | |
2928 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par | |
2929 \endgroup | |
2930 % | |
2931 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the | |
2932 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. | |
2933 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip | |
2934 % | |
69769 | 2935 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if |
2936 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no | |
2937 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would | |
2938 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this | |
2939 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert | |
2940 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. | |
2941 % | |
2942 \penalty 10001 | |
37713 | 2943 \endgroup |
2944 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse | |
2945 \else | |
2946 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the | |
2947 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. | |
2948 \noindent | |
2949 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in | |
2950 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and | |
2951 % eventually be printed. | |
2952 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent | |
2953 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 | |
2954 \unhbox0 | |
2955 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 | |
2956 \endgroup | |
2957 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue | |
2958 \fi | |
2959 } | |
2960 | |
69769 | 2961 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} |
2962 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} | |
37713 | 2963 |
2964 % @table, @ftable, @vtable. | |
69769 | 2965 \envdef\table{% |
2966 \let\itemindex\gobble | |
2967 \tablecheck{table}% | |
2968 } | |
2969 \envdef\ftable{% | |
2970 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% | |
2971 \tablecheck{ftable}% | |
2972 } | |
2973 \envdef\vtable{% | |
2974 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% | |
2975 \tablecheck{vtable}% | |
2976 } | |
2977 \def\tablecheck#1{% | |
2978 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active | |
2979 \endgroup | |
2980 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is | |
2981 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% | |
2982 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% | |
2983 \else | |
2984 \let\next\tablex | |
2985 \fi | |
2986 \next | |
2987 } | |
2988 \def\tablex#1{% | |
2989 \def\itemindicate{#1}% | |
2990 \parsearg\tabley | |
2991 } | |
2992 \def\tabley#1{% | |
2993 {% | |
2994 \makevalueexpandable | |
2995 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% | |
2996 \expandafter | |
2997 }\temp \endtablez | |
2998 } | |
2999 \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% | |
3000 \aboveenvbreak | |
3001 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi | |
3002 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi | |
3003 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi | |
3004 \itemmax=\tableindent | |
3005 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin | |
3006 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent | |
3007 \exdentamount=\tableindent | |
3008 \parindent = 0pt | |
3009 \parskip = \smallskipamount | |
3010 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi | |
3011 \let\item = \internalBitem | |
3012 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx | |
3013 } | |
3014 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} | |
3015 \let\Eftable\Etable | |
3016 \let\Evtable\Etable | |
3017 \let\Eitemize\Etable | |
3018 \let\Eenumerate\Etable | |
37713 | 3019 |
3020 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize | |
3021 | |
3022 \newcount \itemno | |
3023 | |
69769 | 3024 \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} |
3025 | |
3026 \def\doitemize#1{% | |
3027 \aboveenvbreak | |
3028 \itemmax=\itemindent | |
3029 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin | |
3030 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent | |
3031 \exdentamount=\itemindent | |
3032 \parindent=0pt | |
3033 \parskip=\smallskipamount | |
3034 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi | |
3035 \def\itemcontents{#1}% | |
3036 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. | |
3037 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi | |
3038 \let\item=\itemizeitem | |
3039 } | |
3040 | |
3041 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. | |
3042 % | |
3043 \def\itemizeitem{% | |
3044 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations | |
3045 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break | |
3046 {% | |
3047 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a | |
3048 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have | |
3049 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero | |
3050 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the | |
3051 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there | |
3052 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much | |
3053 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least | |
3054 % that's the theory. | |
3055 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi | |
3056 \noindent | |
3057 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% | |
3058 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. | |
3059 \flushcr | |
3060 } | |
37713 | 3061 |
3062 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in | |
3063 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. | |
3064 % | |
3065 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% | |
3066 | |
3067 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, | |
3068 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No | |
3069 % argument is the same as `1'. | |
3070 % | |
69769 | 3071 \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} |
37713 | 3072 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% |
3073 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. | |
3074 \def\thearg{#1}% | |
3075 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi | |
3076 % | |
3077 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a | |
3078 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. | |
3079 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. | |
3080 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at | |
3081 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) | |
3082 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark | |
3083 \ifx\rest\empty | |
3084 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. | |
3085 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. | |
3086 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and | |
3087 % not equal to itself. | |
3088 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. | |
3089 % | |
3090 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from | |
3091 % continuing to look for a <number>. | |
3092 % | |
3093 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax | |
3094 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) | |
3095 \else | |
3096 % It's a letter. | |
3097 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax | |
3098 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter | |
3099 \else | |
3100 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter | |
3101 \fi | |
3102 \fi | |
3103 \else | |
3104 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. | |
3105 \numericenumerate | |
3106 \fi | |
3107 } | |
3108 | |
3109 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is | |
3110 % given in \thearg. | |
3111 % | |
3112 \def\numericenumerate{% | |
3113 \itemno = \thearg | |
3114 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% | |
3115 } | |
3116 | |
3117 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. | |
3118 \def\lowercaseenumerate{% | |
3119 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | |
3120 \startenumeration{% | |
3121 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | |
3122 \ifnum\itemno=0 | |
3123 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | |
3124 alphabet}% | |
3125 \fi | |
3126 \char\lccode\itemno | |
3127 }% | |
3128 } | |
3129 | |
3130 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. | |
3131 \def\uppercaseenumerate{% | |
3132 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | |
3133 \startenumeration{% | |
3134 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | |
3135 \ifnum\itemno=0 | |
3136 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | |
3137 alphabet} | |
3138 \fi | |
3139 \char\uccode\itemno | |
3140 }% | |
3141 } | |
3142 | |
69769 | 3143 % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the |
37713 | 3144 % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in |
3145 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. | |
3146 % | |
3147 \def\startenumeration#1{% | |
3148 \advance\itemno by -1 | |
69769 | 3149 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr |
37713 | 3150 } |
3151 | |
3152 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg | |
3153 % to @enumerate. | |
3154 % | |
3155 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} | |
3156 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} | |
3157 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} | |
3158 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} | |
3159 | |
3160 | |
3161 % @multitable macros | |
3162 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 | |
3163 % | |
3164 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. | |
3165 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width | |
3166 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, | |
3167 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. | |
3168 | |
3169 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. | |
3170 | |
3171 % To make preamble: | |
3172 % | |
3173 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: | |
3174 % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 | |
3175 % @item ... | |
3176 % | |
3177 % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total | |
3178 % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many | |
3179 % columns as desired. | |
3180 | |
3181 | |
3182 % Or use a template: | |
3183 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | |
3184 % @item ... | |
3185 % using the widest term desired in each column. | |
3186 | |
3187 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column | |
3188 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's | |
3189 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, | |
3190 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. | |
3191 | |
69769 | 3192 % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt |
3193 % if they are. | |
37713 | 3194 |
3195 % Sample multitable: | |
3196 | |
3197 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | |
3198 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col | |
3199 % @item | |
3200 % first col stuff | |
3201 % @tab | |
3202 % second col stuff | |
3203 % @tab | |
3204 % third col | |
3205 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff | |
3206 % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. | |
3207 % | |
3208 % They will wrap at the width determined by the template. | |
3209 % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. | |
3210 % @end multitable | |
3211 | |
3212 % Default dimensions may be reset by user. | |
3213 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. | |
3214 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. | |
3215 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. | |
3216 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline | |
3217 % to baseline. | |
3218 % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. | |
3219 % | |
3220 \newskip\multitableparskip | |
3221 \newskip\multitableparindent | |
3222 \newdimen\multitablecolspace | |
3223 \newskip\multitablelinespace | |
3224 \multitableparskip=0pt | |
3225 \multitableparindent=6pt | |
3226 \multitablecolspace=12pt | |
3227 \multitablelinespace=0pt | |
3228 | |
3229 % Macros used to set up halign preamble: | |
3230 % | |
3231 \let\endsetuptable\relax | |
3232 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} | |
3233 \let\columnfractions\relax | |
3234 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} | |
3235 \newif\ifsetpercent | |
3236 | |
69769 | 3237 % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might |
3238 % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. | |
3239 % | |
3240 \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% | |
37713 | 3241 \global\advance\colcount by 1 |
69769 | 3242 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% |
37713 | 3243 \setuptable |
3244 } | |
3245 | |
3246 \newcount\colcount | |
3247 \def\setuptable#1{% | |
3248 \def\firstarg{#1}% | |
3249 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable | |
3250 \let\go = \relax | |
3251 \else | |
3252 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions | |
3253 \global\setpercenttrue | |
3254 \else | |
3255 \ifsetpercent | |
3256 \let\go\pickupwholefraction | |
3257 \else | |
3258 \global\advance\colcount by 1 | |
69769 | 3259 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a |
3260 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. | |
37713 | 3261 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% |
3262 \fi | |
3263 \fi | |
3264 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction | |
3265 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so | |
3266 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. | |
3267 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% | |
3268 \else | |
3269 \let\go = \setuptable | |
3270 \fi% | |
3271 \fi | |
3272 \go | |
3273 } | |
3274 | |
69769 | 3275 % multitable-only commands. |
3276 % | |
3277 % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. | |
3278 % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group | |
3279 % of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab. | |
3280 \def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}% | |
3281 % | |
3282 % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template | |
3283 % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until | |
3284 % we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. | |
3285 % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. | |
3286 \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% | |
37713 | 3287 |
3288 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: | |
3289 % | |
69769 | 3290 \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. |
3291 % | |
3292 \envdef\multitable{% | |
37713 | 3293 \vskip\parskip |
69769 | 3294 \startsavinginserts |
3295 % | |
3296 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. | |
3297 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries | |
3298 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka | |
3299 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. | |
3300 \def\item{\crcr}% | |
3301 % | |
37713 | 3302 \tolerance=9500 |
3303 \hbadness=9500 | |
3304 \setmultitablespacing | |
3305 \parskip=\multitableparskip | |
3306 \parindent=\multitableparindent | |
3307 \overfullrule=0pt | |
3308 \global\colcount=0 | |
69769 | 3309 % |
3310 \everycr = {% | |
3311 \noalign{% | |
3312 \global\everytab={}% | |
3313 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. | |
3314 % Check for saved footnotes, etc. | |
3315 \checkinserts | |
3316 % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. | |
3317 %\filbreak | |
3318 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the | |
3319 % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the | |
3320 % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. | |
3321 }% | |
3322 }% | |
3323 % | |
3324 \parsearg\domultitable | |
3325 } | |
3326 \def\domultitable#1{% | |
37713 | 3327 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: |
3328 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable | |
3329 % | |
3330 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will | |
3331 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. | |
3332 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and | |
3333 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. | |
69769 | 3334 \halign\bgroup &% |
3335 \global\advance\colcount by 1 | |
3336 \multistrut | |
3337 \vtop{% | |
3338 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: | |
3339 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname | |
3340 % | |
3341 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other | |
3342 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after | |
3343 % the first one. | |
3344 % | |
3345 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace | |
3346 % to the width of each template entry. | |
3347 % | |
3348 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will | |
3349 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip | |
3350 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at | |
3351 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. | |
3352 % | |
3353 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. | |
3354 \rightskip=0pt | |
3355 \ifnum\colcount=1 | |
3356 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. | |
3357 \advance\hsize by\leftskip | |
3358 \else | |
3359 \ifsetpercent \else | |
3360 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize | |
3361 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. | |
3362 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace | |
3363 \fi | |
3364 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: | |
3365 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace | |
3366 \fi | |
3367 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious | |
3368 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the | |
3369 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. | |
3370 % For example: | |
3371 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 | |
3372 % @item @code{#} | |
3373 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. | |
3374 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively | |
3375 % marking characters. | |
3376 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut | |
3377 }\cr | |
3378 } | |
3379 \def\Emultitable{% | |
3380 \crcr | |
3381 \egroup % end the \halign | |
3382 \global\setpercentfalse | |
3383 } | |
3384 | |
3385 \def\setmultitablespacing{% | |
3386 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing | |
3387 % | |
3388 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in | |
3389 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on | |
3390 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. | |
3391 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. | |
37713 | 3392 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt |
3393 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip | |
3394 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 | |
69769 | 3395 \fi |
37713 | 3396 %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of |
3397 %% table. If not, do nothing. | |
3398 %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. | |
3399 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace | |
3400 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | |
3401 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller | |
3402 %% than skip between lines in the table. | |
3403 \fi% | |
3404 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt | |
3405 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | |
3406 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller | |
3407 %% than skip between lines in the table. | |
3408 \fi} | |
3409 | |
3410 | |
3411 \message{conditionals,} | |
69769 | 3412 |
3413 % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, | |
3414 % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't | |
3415 % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we | |
3416 % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't | |
3417 % attempt to close an environment group. | |
3418 % | |
3419 \def\makecond#1{% | |
3420 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax | |
3421 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 | |
3422 } | |
3423 \makecond{iftex} | |
3424 \makecond{ifnotdocbook} | |
3425 \makecond{ifnothtml} | |
3426 \makecond{ifnotinfo} | |
3427 \makecond{ifnotplaintext} | |
3428 \makecond{ifnotxml} | |
3429 | |
3430 % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. | |
3431 % | |
3432 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} | |
3433 \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} | |
3434 \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} | |
3435 \def\html{\doignore{html}} | |
3436 \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} | |
47284 | 3437 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} |
37713 | 3438 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} |
69769 | 3439 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} |
47284 | 3440 \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} |
69769 | 3441 \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} |
3442 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} | |
37713 | 3443 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} |
69769 | 3444 \def\xml{\doignore{xml}} |
3445 | |
3446 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. | |
3447 % | |
3448 % A count to remember the depth of nesting. | |
3449 \newcount\doignorecount | |
3450 | |
37713 | 3451 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup |
69769 | 3452 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: |
3453 \obeylines | |
3454 \catcode`\@ = \other | |
3455 \catcode`\{ = \other | |
3456 \catcode`\} = \other | |
37713 | 3457 % |
3458 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. | |
69769 | 3459 \spaceisspace |
3460 % | |
3461 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. | |
3462 \doignorecount = 0 | |
3463 % | |
3464 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. | |
3465 \dodoignore{#1}% | |
3466 } | |
3467 | |
3468 { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. | |
3469 \obeylines % | |
3470 % | |
3471 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% | |
3472 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. | |
3473 % | |
3474 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. | |
3475 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% | |
3476 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% | |
3477 % | |
3478 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a | |
3479 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for | |
3480 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) | |
3481 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% | |
3482 % | |
3483 % And now expand that command. | |
3484 \doignoretext ^^M% | |
3485 }% | |
3486 } | |
3487 | |
3488 \def\doignoreyyy#1{% | |
3489 \def\temp{#1}% | |
3490 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. | |
3491 \let\next\doignoretextzzz | |
3492 \else % Found a nested condition, ... | |
3493 \advance\doignorecount by 1 | |
3494 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. | |
3495 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). | |
47284 | 3496 \fi |
69769 | 3497 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. |
3498 } | |
3499 | |
3500 % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". | |
3501 % | |
3502 \def\doignoretextzzz#1{% | |
3503 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. | |
3504 \let\next\enddoignore | |
3505 \else % Still inside a nested condition. | |
3506 \advance\doignorecount by -1 | |
3507 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. | |
3508 \fi | |
3509 \next | |
3510 } | |
3511 | |
3512 % Finish off ignored text. | |
3513 { \obeylines% | |
3514 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim | |
3515 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional | |
3516 % would result in a blank line in the output. | |
3517 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% | |
3518 } | |
3519 | |
37713 | 3520 |
3521 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. | |
3522 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. | |
3523 % | |
3524 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be | |
3525 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our | |
3526 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we | |
69769 | 3527 % didn't need it. |
3528 % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. | |
3529 % | |
3530 \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} | |
37713 | 3531 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% |
69769 | 3532 {% |
3533 \makevalueexpandable | |
3534 \def\temp{#2}% | |
3535 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% | |
3536 \ifx\temp\empty | |
3537 \next{}% | |
3538 \else | |
3539 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz | |
3540 \fi | |
3541 }% | |
3542 } | |
3543 % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. | |
3544 \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} | |
37713 | 3545 |
3546 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. | |
3547 % | |
69769 | 3548 \parseargdef\clear{% |
3549 {% | |
3550 \makevalueexpandable | |
3551 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax | |
3552 }% | |
3553 } | |
37713 | 3554 |
3555 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. | |
69769 | 3556 \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} |
3557 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} | |
37713 | 3558 { |
69769 | 3559 \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active |
3560 % | |
3561 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% | |
3562 \let\value = \expandablevalue | |
3563 % We don't want these characters active, ... | |
3564 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other | |
3565 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if | |
3566 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. | |
3567 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. | |
3568 \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore | |
3569 } | |
3570 } | |
37713 | 3571 |
3572 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's | |
69769 | 3573 % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). |
3574 % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since | |
3575 % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the | |
3576 % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain | |
3577 % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work | |
3578 % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). | |
37713 | 3579 % |
3580 \def\expandablevalue#1{% | |
3581 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax | |
3582 {[No value for ``#1'']}% | |
69769 | 3583 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% |
37713 | 3584 \else |
3585 \csname SET#1\endcsname | |
3586 \fi | |
3587 } | |
3588 | |
3589 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined | |
3590 % with @set. | |
3591 % | |
69769 | 3592 % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. |
3593 % | |
3594 \makecond{ifset} | |
3595 \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} | |
3596 \def\doifset#1#2{% | |
3597 {% | |
3598 \makevalueexpandable | |
3599 \let\next=\empty | |
3600 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax | |
3601 #1% If not set, redefine \next. | |
3602 \fi | |
3603 \expandafter | |
3604 }\next | |
3605 } | |
3606 \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} | |
37713 | 3607 |
3608 % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been | |
3609 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. | |
3610 % | |
69769 | 3611 % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the |
3612 % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, | |
3613 % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. | |
3614 % | |
3615 \makecond{ifclear} | |
3616 \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} | |
3617 \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} | |
3618 | |
3619 % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file | |
3620 % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. | |
3621 \let\dircategory=\comment | |
37713 | 3622 |
3623 % @defininfoenclose. | |
3624 \let\definfoenclose=\comment | |
3625 | |
3626 | |
3627 \message{indexing,} | |
3628 % Index generation facilities | |
3629 | |
3630 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite | |
69769 | 3631 % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. |
3632 \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} | |
37713 | 3633 |
3634 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. | |
3635 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that | |
3636 % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. | |
3637 % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for | |
3638 % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. | |
3639 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long | |
3640 % for the sake of vms. | |
3641 % | |
3642 \def\newindex#1{% | |
3643 \iflinks | |
3644 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | |
3645 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file | |
3646 \fi | |
3647 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index | |
3648 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} | |
3649 } | |
3650 | |
3651 % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} | |
3652 % | |
3653 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} | |
3654 | |
3655 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. | |
3656 % | |
3657 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} | |
3658 % | |
3659 \def\newcodeindex#1{% | |
3660 \iflinks | |
3661 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | |
3662 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 | |
3663 \fi | |
3664 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% | |
3665 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% | |
3666 } | |
3667 | |
3668 | |
3669 % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. | |
3670 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
3671 % |
37713 | 3672 % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo |
3673 % inside @code. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
3674 % |
37713 | 3675 \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} |
3676 \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} | |
3677 | |
3678 % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), | |
3679 % #3 the target index (bar). | |
3680 \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% | |
3681 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up | |
3682 % closing the target index. | |
3683 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined | |
3684 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the | |
3685 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. | |
3686 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname | |
3687 \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 | |
3688 \fi | |
3689 % redefine \fooindfile: | |
3690 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname | |
3691 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp | |
3692 % redefine \fooindex: | |
3693 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% | |
3694 } | |
3695 | |
3696 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. | |
3697 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, | |
3698 % and it is "foo", the name of the index. | |
3699 | |
3700 % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. | |
3701 % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. | |
3702 | |
3703 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} | |
3704 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. | |
3705 | |
3706 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} | |
3707 \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} | |
3708 | |
3709 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. | |
3710 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} | |
3711 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} | |
3712 | |
69769 | 3713 % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. |
3714 % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, | |
3715 % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
3716 % |
37713 | 3717 \def\indexdummies{% |
69769 | 3718 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. |
3719 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. | |
3720 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% | |
71093 | 3721 % |
69769 | 3722 % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. |
3723 % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes | |
3724 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. | |
3725 \let\{ = \mylbrace | |
3726 \let\} = \myrbrace | |
3727 % | |
71093 | 3728 % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is |
3729 % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts | |
3730 % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is, | |
3731 % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput | |
3732 % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput | |
3733 % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that | |
3734 % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it | |
3735 % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that | |
3736 % is still getting written without apparent harm. | |
3737 % | |
3738 % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to | |
3739 % help-texinfo, 22may06): | |
3740 % @macro funindex {WORD} | |
3741 % @findex xyz | |
3742 % @end macro | |
3743 % ... | |
3744 % @funindex commtest | |
3745 % | |
3746 % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor. | |
3747 % | |
3748 % Sample whatsit resulting: | |
3749 % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}} | |
3750 % | |
3751 % So: | |
3752 \let\endinput = \empty | |
3753 % | |
69769 | 3754 % Do the redefinitions. |
3755 \commondummies | |
3756 } | |
3757 | |
3758 % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to | |
3759 % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of | |
3760 % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, | |
3761 % this will be simpler. | |
3762 % | |
3763 \def\atdummies{% | |
3764 \def\@{@@}% | |
3765 \def\ {@ }% | |
3766 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd | |
3767 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd | |
3768 % | |
3769 % Do the redefinitions. | |
3770 \commondummies | |
3771 \otherbackslash | |
3772 } | |
3773 | |
3774 % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. | |
3775 % | |
3776 \def\commondummies{% | |
3777 % | |
3778 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively | |
3779 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words, | |
3780 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for | |
3781 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word | |
3782 % from whatever follows. | |
3783 % | |
3784 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the | |
3785 % space. | |
3786 % | |
3787 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and | |
3788 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then | |
3789 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). | |
3790 % | |
3791 \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% | |
3792 \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% | |
3793 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter | |
3794 % | |
3795 \commondummiesnofonts | |
3796 % | |
3797 \definedummyletter\_% | |
3798 % | |
3799 % Non-English letters. | |
3800 \definedummyword\AA | |
3801 \definedummyword\AE | |
3802 \definedummyword\L | |
3803 \definedummyword\OE | |
3804 \definedummyword\O | |
3805 \definedummyword\aa | |
3806 \definedummyword\ae | |
3807 \definedummyword\l | |
3808 \definedummyword\oe | |
3809 \definedummyword\o | |
3810 \definedummyword\ss | |
3811 \definedummyword\exclamdown | |
3812 \definedummyword\questiondown | |
3813 \definedummyword\ordf | |
3814 \definedummyword\ordm | |
3815 % | |
3816 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. | |
3817 \definedummyword\bf | |
3818 \definedummyword\gtr | |
3819 \definedummyword\hat | |
3820 \definedummyword\less | |
3821 \definedummyword\sf | |
3822 \definedummyword\sl | |
3823 \definedummyword\tclose | |
3824 \definedummyword\tt | |
3825 % | |
3826 \definedummyword\LaTeX | |
3827 \definedummyword\TeX | |
3828 % | |
3829 % Assorted special characters. | |
3830 \definedummyword\bullet | |
3831 \definedummyword\comma | |
3832 \definedummyword\copyright | |
3833 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol | |
3834 \definedummyword\dots | |
3835 \definedummyword\enddots | |
3836 \definedummyword\equiv | |
3837 \definedummyword\error | |
3838 \definedummyword\euro | |
3839 \definedummyword\expansion | |
3840 \definedummyword\minus | |
3841 \definedummyword\pounds | |
3842 \definedummyword\point | |
3843 \definedummyword\print | |
3844 \definedummyword\result | |
73178 | 3845 \definedummyword\textdegree |
69769 | 3846 % |
3847 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. | |
3848 \macrolist | |
3849 % | |
3850 \normalturnoffactive | |
3851 % | |
3852 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any | |
3853 % (non-fully-expandable) commands. | |
3854 \makevalueexpandable | |
3855 } | |
3856 | |
3857 % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. | |
3858 % | |
3859 \def\commondummiesnofonts{% | |
3860 % Control letters and accents. | |
3861 \definedummyletter\!% | |
3862 \definedummyaccent\"% | |
3863 \definedummyaccent\'% | |
3864 \definedummyletter\*% | |
3865 \definedummyaccent\,% | |
3866 \definedummyletter\.% | |
3867 \definedummyletter\/% | |
3868 \definedummyletter\:% | |
3869 \definedummyaccent\=% | |
3870 \definedummyletter\?% | |
3871 \definedummyaccent\^% | |
3872 \definedummyaccent\`% | |
3873 \definedummyaccent\~% | |
3874 \definedummyword\u | |
3875 \definedummyword\v | |
3876 \definedummyword\H | |
3877 \definedummyword\dotaccent | |
3878 \definedummyword\ringaccent | |
3879 \definedummyword\tieaccent | |
3880 \definedummyword\ubaraccent | |
3881 \definedummyword\udotaccent | |
3882 \definedummyword\dotless | |
3883 % | |
3884 % Texinfo font commands. | |
3885 \definedummyword\b | |
3886 \definedummyword\i | |
3887 \definedummyword\r | |
3888 \definedummyword\sc | |
3889 \definedummyword\t | |
3890 % | |
3891 % Commands that take arguments. | |
3892 \definedummyword\acronym | |
3893 \definedummyword\cite | |
3894 \definedummyword\code | |
3895 \definedummyword\command | |
3896 \definedummyword\dfn | |
3897 \definedummyword\emph | |
3898 \definedummyword\env | |
3899 \definedummyword\file | |
3900 \definedummyword\kbd | |
3901 \definedummyword\key | |
3902 \definedummyword\math | |
3903 \definedummyword\option | |
3904 \definedummyword\pxref | |
3905 \definedummyword\ref | |
3906 \definedummyword\samp | |
3907 \definedummyword\strong | |
3908 \definedummyword\tie | |
3909 \definedummyword\uref | |
3910 \definedummyword\url | |
3911 \definedummyword\var | |
3912 \definedummyword\verb | |
3913 \definedummyword\w | |
3914 \definedummyword\xref | |
3915 } | |
3916 | |
3917 % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index | |
3918 % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all | |
3919 % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string | |
3920 % would be for a given command (usually its argument). | |
3921 % | |
37713 | 3922 \def\indexnofonts{% |
69769 | 3923 % Accent commands should become @asis. |
3924 \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% | |
3925 % We can just ignore other control letters. | |
3926 \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% | |
3927 % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. | |
3928 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent | |
3929 % | |
3930 \commondummiesnofonts | |
3931 % | |
3932 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command | |
3933 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. | |
3934 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. | |
3935 %\let\tt=\asis | |
3936 % | |
3937 \def\ { }% | |
3938 \def\@{@}% | |
3939 % how to handle braces? | |
3940 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% | |
3941 % | |
3942 % Non-English letters. | |
3943 \def\AA{AA}% | |
3944 \def\AE{AE}% | |
3945 \def\L{L}% | |
3946 \def\OE{OE}% | |
3947 \def\O{O}% | |
3948 \def\aa{aa}% | |
3949 \def\ae{ae}% | |
3950 \def\l{l}% | |
3951 \def\oe{oe}% | |
3952 \def\o{o}% | |
3953 \def\ss{ss}% | |
3954 \def\exclamdown{!}% | |
3955 \def\questiondown{?}% | |
3956 \def\ordf{a}% | |
3957 \def\ordm{o}% | |
3958 % | |
3959 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% | |
3960 \def\TeX{TeX}% | |
3961 % | |
3962 % Assorted special characters. | |
3963 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) | |
3964 \def\bullet{bullet}% | |
3965 \def\comma{,}% | |
3966 \def\copyright{copyright}% | |
3967 \def\registeredsymbol{R}% | |
3968 \def\dots{...}% | |
3969 \def\enddots{...}% | |
3970 \def\equiv{==}% | |
3971 \def\error{error}% | |
3972 \def\euro{euro}% | |
3973 \def\expansion{==>}% | |
3974 \def\minus{-}% | |
3975 \def\pounds{pounds}% | |
3976 \def\point{.}% | |
3977 \def\print{-|}% | |
3978 \def\result{=>}% | |
73178 | 3979 \def\textdegree{degrees}% |
69769 | 3980 % |
3981 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). | |
3982 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. | |
3983 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up | |
3984 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry | |
3985 % that starts with \. | |
3986 % | |
3987 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them | |
3988 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that | |
3989 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. | |
3990 % | |
3991 \macrolist | |
3992 } | |
37713 | 3993 |
3994 \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. | |
3995 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? | |
3996 | |
3997 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. | |
69769 | 3998 % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. |
3999 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} | |
37713 | 4000 |
4001 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes. | |
4002 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- | |
69769 | 4003 % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception |
4004 % is with most defuns, which call us directly). | |
37713 | 4005 % |
4006 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% | |
69769 | 4007 \iflinks |
4008 {% | |
4009 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). | |
4010 \toks0 = {#2}% | |
4011 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. | |
4012 \def\thirdarg{#3}% | |
4013 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else | |
4014 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% | |
4015 \fi | |
4016 % | |
4017 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% | |
4018 % | |
77025 | 4019 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite |
69769 | 4020 }% |
4021 \fi | |
4022 } | |
4023 | |
4024 % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: | |
4025 % | |
4026 \def\dosubindwrite{% | |
37713 | 4027 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. |
4028 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else | |
69769 | 4029 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% |
37713 | 4030 \fi |
69769 | 4031 % |
4032 % Remember, we are within a group. | |
4033 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage | |
4034 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now | |
4035 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. | |
4036 % | |
4037 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to | |
4038 % get the string to sort by. | |
4039 {\indexnofonts | |
4040 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion | |
4041 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% | |
4042 }% | |
4043 % | |
4044 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and | |
4045 % the original text, including any font commands. We write | |
4046 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the | |
4047 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s | |
4048 % sorted result. | |
4049 \edef\temp{% | |
4050 \write\writeto{% | |
4051 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% | |
37713 | 4052 }% |
69769 | 4053 \temp |
4054 } | |
4055 | |
77025 | 4056 % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: |
69769 | 4057 % |
4058 % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it | |
4059 % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting | |
4060 % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the | |
77025 | 4061 % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that |
4062 % sequences like this: | |
69769 | 4063 % @end defun |
4064 % @tindex whatever | |
4065 % @defun ... | |
4066 % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the | |
4067 % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of | |
4068 % the previous defun. | |
4069 % | |
4070 % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We | |
4071 % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. | |
4072 % | |
4073 % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. | |
4074 % | |
4075 % But wait, there is a catch there: | |
4076 % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not | |
4077 % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts | |
4078 % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual | |
4079 % representation of the skip. | |
4080 % | |
4081 % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that | |
4082 % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). | |
4083 % | |
4084 \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} | |
4085 % | |
77025 | 4086 \newskip\whatsitskip |
4087 \newcount\whatsitpenalty | |
4088 % | |
69769 | 4089 % ..., ready, GO: |
4090 % | |
77025 | 4091 \def\safewhatsit#1{% |
4092 \ifhmode | |
4093 #1% | |
4094 \else | |
69769 | 4095 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. |
77025 | 4096 \whatsitskip = \lastskip |
69769 | 4097 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% |
77025 | 4098 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty |
69769 | 4099 % |
4100 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a | |
4101 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this | |
4102 % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a | |
4103 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential | |
4104 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. | |
4105 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro | |
4106 \else | |
77025 | 4107 \vskip-\whatsitskip |
69769 | 4108 \fi |
4109 % | |
77025 | 4110 #1% |
69769 | 4111 % |
4112 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro | |
4113 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and | |
4114 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want | |
4115 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various | |
4116 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any | |
4117 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: | |
4118 % | |
4119 % @deffn deffn-whatever | |
4120 % @vindex index-whatever | |
4121 % Description. | |
4122 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit | |
4123 % and the "Description." paragraph. | |
77025 | 4124 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi |
69769 | 4125 \else |
4126 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, | |
4127 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item | |
4128 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. | |
77025 | 4129 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip |
69769 | 4130 \fi |
77025 | 4131 \fi |
37713 | 4132 } |
4133 | |
4134 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like | |
4135 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} | |
4136 % or | |
4137 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} | |
4138 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files | |
4139 % containing these kinds of lines: | |
4140 % \initial {c} | |
4141 % before the first topic whose initial is c | |
4142 % \entry {topic}{pagelist} | |
4143 % for a topic that is used without subtopics | |
4144 % \primary {topic} | |
4145 % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics | |
4146 % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} | |
4147 % for each subtopic. | |
4148 | |
4149 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands | |
4150 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. | |
4151 | |
4152 \def\findex {\fnindex} | |
4153 \def\kindex {\kyindex} | |
4154 \def\cindex {\cpindex} | |
4155 \def\vindex {\vrindex} | |
4156 \def\tindex {\tpindex} | |
4157 \def\pindex {\pgindex} | |
4158 | |
4159 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} | |
4160 {\obeylines % | |
4161 \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % | |
4162 \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} | |
4163 | |
4164 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. | |
4165 | |
4166 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. | |
4167 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). | |
4168 % | |
69769 | 4169 \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup |
37713 | 4170 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% |
4171 % | |
4172 \smallfonts \rm | |
4173 \tolerance = 9500 | |
77084 | 4174 \plainfrenchspacing |
69769 | 4175 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. |
37713 | 4176 % |
4177 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. | |
4178 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains | |
4179 % \initial {@} | |
4180 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces | |
4181 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). | |
4182 \catcode`\@ = 11 | |
4183 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s | |
4184 \ifeof 1 | |
4185 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, | |
4186 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the | |
4187 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure | |
4188 % there is some text. | |
4189 \putwordIndexNonexistent | |
4190 \else | |
4191 % | |
4192 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof | |
4193 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so | |
4194 % it can discover if there is anything in it. | |
4195 \read 1 to \temp | |
4196 \ifeof 1 | |
4197 \putwordIndexIsEmpty | |
4198 \else | |
4199 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape | |
4200 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change | |
4201 % to make right now. | |
69769 | 4202 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% |
37713 | 4203 \catcode`\\ = 0 |
4204 \escapechar = `\\ | |
4205 \begindoublecolumns | |
4206 \input \jobname.#1s | |
4207 \enddoublecolumns | |
4208 \fi | |
4209 \fi | |
4210 \closein 1 | |
4211 \endgroup} | |
4212 | |
4213 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. | |
4214 % Change them to control the appearance of the index. | |
4215 | |
4216 \def\initial#1{{% | |
4217 % Some minor font changes for the special characters. | |
4218 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt | |
4219 % | |
4220 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. | |
4221 \removelastskip | |
4222 % | |
4223 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. | |
69769 | 4224 \nobreak |
4225 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip | |
4226 \penalty 0 | |
4227 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip | |
37713 | 4228 % |
4229 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of | |
4230 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column | |
4231 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch | |
4232 % we need before each entry, but it's better. | |
4233 % | |
4234 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. | |
4235 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip | |
4236 \leftline{\secbf #1}% | |
4237 % Do our best not to break after the initial. | |
4238 \nobreak | |
69769 | 4239 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip |
37713 | 4240 }} |
4241 | |
69769 | 4242 % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and |
4243 % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index | |
4244 % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. | |
4245 % | |
4246 % A straightforward implementation would start like this: | |
4247 % \def\entry#1#2{... | |
4248 % But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to | |
4249 % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- | |
4250 % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. | |
4251 % | |
4252 % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. | |
4253 % --kasal, 21nov03 | |
4254 \def\entry{% | |
4255 \begingroup | |
4256 % | |
4257 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't | |
4258 % affect previous text. | |
4259 \par | |
4260 % | |
4261 % Do not fill out the last line with white space. | |
4262 \parfillskip = 0in | |
4263 % | |
4264 % No extra space above this paragraph. | |
4265 \parskip = 0in | |
4266 % | |
4267 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. | |
4268 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 | |
4269 % | |
4270 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number | |
4271 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the | |
4272 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large | |
4273 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across | |
4274 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. | |
4275 % | |
4276 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start | |
4277 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. | |
4278 \hangindent = 2em | |
4279 % | |
4280 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line | |
4281 % with blank space. | |
4282 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil | |
37713 | 4283 % |
69769 | 4284 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing |
4285 % columns. | |
4286 \vskip 0pt plus1pt | |
4287 % | |
4288 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): | |
4289 \afterassignment\doentry | |
4290 \let\temp = | |
4291 } | |
4292 \def\doentry{% | |
4293 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. | |
4294 \noindent | |
4295 \aftergroup\finishentry | |
4296 % And now comes the text of the entry. | |
4297 } | |
4298 \def\finishentry#1{% | |
4299 % #1 is the page number. | |
37713 | 4300 % |
69769 | 4301 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if |
4302 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be | |
4303 % cursed by a Unix daemon. | |
78048 | 4304 \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}% |
4305 \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt | |
69769 | 4306 \ % |
37713 | 4307 \else |
69769 | 4308 % |
4309 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out | |
4310 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the | |
4311 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) | |
4312 \hfil\penalty50 | |
4313 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. | |
4314 % | |
4315 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as | |
4316 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull | |
4317 % \hbox ensues. | |
4318 \ifpdf | |
4319 \pdfgettoks#1.% | |
4320 \ \the\toksA | |
4321 \else | |
4322 \ #1% | |
4323 \fi | |
37713 | 4324 \fi |
69769 | 4325 \par |
4326 \endgroup | |
4327 } | |
37713 | 4328 |
71493 | 4329 % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. |
37713 | 4330 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders |
71493 | 4331 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} |
37713 | 4332 |
4333 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} | |
4334 | |
4335 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm | |
4336 \def\secondary#1#2{{% | |
4337 \parfillskip=0in | |
4338 \parskip=0in | |
4339 \hangindent=1in | |
4340 \hangafter=1 | |
4341 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill | |
4342 \ifpdf | |
4343 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. | |
4344 \else | |
4345 #2 | |
4346 \fi | |
4347 \par | |
4348 }} | |
4349 | |
4350 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. | |
4351 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, | |
4352 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. | |
4353 \catcode`\@=11 | |
4354 | |
4355 \newbox\partialpage | |
4356 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize | |
4357 | |
4358 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns | |
4359 % Grab any single-column material above us. | |
4360 \output = {% | |
4361 % | |
4362 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a | |
4363 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output | |
4364 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is | |
4365 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In | |
4366 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal | |
4367 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this | |
4368 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. | |
4369 \ifvoid\partialpage \else | |
4370 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% | |
4371 \fi | |
4372 % | |
4373 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% | |
4374 % Unvbox the main output page. | |
4375 \unvbox\PAGE | |
4376 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip | |
4377 }% | |
4378 }% | |
4379 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage | |
4380 % | |
4381 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. | |
4382 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% | |
4383 % | |
4384 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this | |
4385 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 | |
4386 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple | |
4387 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the | |
4388 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. | |
4389 % | |
4390 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between | |
4391 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it | |
4392 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant | |
4393 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) | |
4394 % as it did when we hard-coded it. | |
4395 % | |
4396 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we | |
4397 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) | |
4398 % been clobbered. | |
4399 % | |
4400 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize | |
4401 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize | |
4402 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 | |
4403 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | |
4404 % | |
4405 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, | |
4406 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) | |
4407 \vsize = 2\vsize | |
4408 } | |
4409 | |
4410 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except | |
4411 % the last. | |
4412 % | |
4413 \def\doublecolumnout{% | |
4414 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth | |
4415 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal | |
4416 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the | |
4417 % previous page. | |
4418 \dimen@ = \vsize | |
4419 \divide\dimen@ by 2 | |
4420 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage | |
4421 % | |
4422 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. | |
4423 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ | |
4424 \onepageout\pagesofar | |
4425 \unvbox255 | |
4426 \penalty\outputpenalty | |
4427 } | |
4428 % | |
4429 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, | |
4430 % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. | |
4431 \def\pagesofar{% | |
4432 \unvbox\partialpage | |
4433 % | |
4434 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | |
4435 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize | |
4436 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% | |
4437 } | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
4438 % |
37713 | 4439 % All done with double columns. |
4440 \def\enddoublecolumns{% | |
77025 | 4441 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised |
4442 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the | |
4443 % following situation: | |
4444 % | |
4445 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. | |
4446 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no | |
4447 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last | |
4448 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not | |
4449 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following | |
4450 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject | |
4451 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output | |
4452 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last | |
4453 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which | |
4454 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with | |
4455 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as | |
4456 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page | |
4457 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the | |
4458 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page | |
4459 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final | |
4460 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after | |
4461 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns | |
4462 % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see | |
4463 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. | |
4464 % | |
4465 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the | |
4466 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). | |
4467 \penalty0 | |
4468 % | |
37713 | 4469 \output = {% |
4470 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the | |
4471 % current page, no automatic page break. | |
4472 \balancecolumns | |
4473 % | |
4474 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, | |
4475 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output | |
4476 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not | |
4477 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal | |
4478 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be | |
4479 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes | |
4480 % the output somewhat more palatable.) | |
4481 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% | |
4482 }% | |
4483 \eject | |
4484 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns | |
4485 % | |
4486 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted | |
4487 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column | |
4488 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the | |
4489 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). | |
4490 \pagegoal = \vsize | |
4491 } | |
4492 % | |
4493 % Called at the end of the double column material. | |
4494 \def\balancecolumns{% | |
4495 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. | |
4496 \dimen@ = \ht0 | |
4497 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip | |
4498 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip | |
4499 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to | |
4500 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% | |
4501 \splittopskip = \topskip | |
4502 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. | |
4503 {% | |
4504 \vbadness = 10000 | |
4505 \loop | |
4506 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 | |
4507 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ | |
4508 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ | |
4509 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt | |
4510 \repeat | |
4511 }% | |
4512 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% | |
4513 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% | |
4514 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% | |
4515 % | |
4516 \pagesofar | |
4517 } | |
4518 \catcode`\@ = \other | |
4519 | |
4520 | |
4521 \message{sectioning,} | |
4522 % Chapters, sections, etc. | |
4523 | |
69769 | 4524 % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered |
4525 % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf | |
4526 % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter | |
4527 % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 | |
4528 % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) | |
4529 \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 | |
37713 | 4530 \newcount\chapno |
4531 \newcount\secno \secno=0 | |
4532 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 | |
4533 \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 | |
4534 | |
4535 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... | |
4536 \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ | |
69769 | 4537 % |
37713 | 4538 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} |
69769 | 4539 % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple |
4540 % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual | |
37713 | 4541 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset. |
69769 | 4542 % |
37713 | 4543 \def\appendixletter{% |
4544 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% | |
4545 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% | |
4546 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% | |
4547 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% | |
4548 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% | |
4549 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% | |
4550 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% | |
4551 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% | |
4552 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% | |
4553 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% | |
4554 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% | |
4555 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% | |
4556 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% | |
4557 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% | |
4558 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% | |
4559 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% | |
4560 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% | |
4561 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% | |
4562 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% | |
4563 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% | |
4564 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% | |
4565 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% | |
4566 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% | |
4567 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% | |
4568 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% | |
4569 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% | |
4570 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is | |
4571 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not | |
4572 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out | |
4573 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. | |
4574 \else\char\the\appendixno | |
4575 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | |
4576 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} | |
4577 | |
4578 % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. | |
4579 % page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise. | |
69769 | 4580 % However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks. |
37713 | 4581 \def\thischapter{} |
4582 \def\thissection{} | |
4583 | |
4584 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level | |
69769 | 4585 \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count |
37713 | 4586 |
4587 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. | |
4588 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} | |
4589 \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name | |
4590 | |
4591 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. | |
4592 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} | |
4593 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name | |
4594 | |
69769 | 4595 % we only have subsub. |
4596 \chardef\maxseclevel = 3 | |
4597 % | |
4598 % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. | |
4599 % To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: | |
4600 \chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel | |
4601 % | |
4602 % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: | |
4603 % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. | |
4604 \def\chapheadtype{N} | |
4605 | |
4606 % Choose a heading macro | |
4607 % #1 is heading type | |
4608 % #2 is heading level | |
4609 % #3 is text for heading | |
4610 \def\genhead#1#2#3{% | |
4611 % Compute the abs. sec. level: | |
4612 \absseclevel=#2 | |
4613 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase | |
4614 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: | |
4615 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 | |
4616 \absseclevel = 0 | |
37713 | 4617 \else |
69769 | 4618 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 |
4619 \absseclevel = 3 | |
4620 \fi | |
37713 | 4621 \fi |
69769 | 4622 % The heading type: |
4623 \def\headtype{#1}% | |
4624 \if \headtype U% | |
4625 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel | |
4626 \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel | |
4627 \fi | |
37713 | 4628 \else |
69769 | 4629 % Check for appendix sections: |
4630 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 | |
4631 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% | |
4632 \else | |
4633 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% | |
4634 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% | |
4635 \fi\fi | |
4636 \fi | |
4637 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: | |
4638 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel | |
4639 \def\headtype{U}% | |
4640 \else | |
4641 \chardef\unmlevel = 3 | |
4642 \fi | |
4643 \fi | |
4644 % Now print the heading: | |
4645 \if \headtype U% | |
4646 \ifcase\absseclevel | |
4647 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% | |
4648 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% | |
4649 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4650 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4651 \fi | |
4652 \else | |
4653 \if \headtype A% | |
4654 \ifcase\absseclevel | |
4655 \appendixzzz{#3}% | |
4656 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% | |
4657 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4658 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4659 \fi | |
4660 \else | |
4661 \ifcase\absseclevel | |
4662 \chapterzzz{#3}% | |
4663 \or \seczzz{#3}% | |
4664 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4665 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4666 \fi | |
4667 \fi | |
37713 | 4668 \fi |
69769 | 4669 \suppressfirstparagraphindent |
4670 } | |
4671 | |
4672 % an interface: | |
4673 \def\numhead{\genhead N} | |
4674 \def\apphead{\genhead A} | |
4675 \def\unnmhead{\genhead U} | |
4676 | |
4677 % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset | |
4678 % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. | |
4679 % | |
4680 % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers | |
4681 % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. | |
4682 \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty | |
4683 % | |
4684 \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz | |
4685 \def\chapterzzz#1{% | |
4686 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such | |
4687 % as an @include file. | |
4688 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | |
4689 \global\advance\chapno by 1 | |
4690 % | |
4691 % Used for \float. | |
4692 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% | |
4693 \resetallfloatnos | |
4694 % | |
4695 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% | |
4696 % | |
4697 % Write the actual heading. | |
4698 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% | |
4699 % | |
4700 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. | |
4701 \global\let\section = \numberedsec | |
4702 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | |
4703 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | |
4704 } | |
4705 | |
4706 \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz | |
4707 \def\appendixzzz#1{% | |
4708 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | |
4709 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 | |
4710 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% | |
4711 \resetallfloatnos | |
4712 % | |
4713 \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% | |
4714 \message{\appendixnum}% | |
4715 % | |
4716 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% | |
4717 % | |
4718 \global\let\section = \appendixsec | |
4719 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec | |
4720 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec | |
4721 } | |
4722 | |
4723 \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz | |
4724 \def\unnumberedzzz#1{% | |
4725 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | |
4726 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 | |
4727 % | |
4728 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. | |
4729 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty | |
4730 \resetallfloatnos | |
4731 % | |
4732 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the | |
4733 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX | |
4734 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX | |
4735 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant | |
4736 % to be executed, not expanded). | |
4737 % | |
4738 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear | |
4739 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use | |
4740 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, | |
4741 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for | |
4742 % the toc entries.) | |
4743 \toks0 = {#1}% | |
4744 \message{(\the\toks0)}% | |
4745 % | |
4746 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% | |
4747 % | |
4748 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec | |
4749 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec | |
4750 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec | |
37713 | 4751 } |
4752 | |
4753 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. | |
69769 | 4754 \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% |
4755 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break | |
4756 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. | |
4757 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 | |
4758 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters | |
4759 \unnmhead0{#1}% | |
4760 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax | |
4761 } | |
37713 | 4762 |
4763 % @top is like @unnumbered. | |
69769 | 4764 \let\top\unnumbered |
37713 | 4765 |
4766 % Sections. | |
69769 | 4767 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz |
4768 \def\seczzz#1{% | |
4769 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | |
4770 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% | |
4771 } | |
4772 | |
4773 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz | |
4774 \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% | |
4775 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | |
4776 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% | |
4777 } | |
4778 \let\appendixsec\appendixsection | |
4779 | |
4780 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz | |
4781 \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% | |
4782 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | |
4783 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% | |
37713 | 4784 } |
4785 | |
4786 % Subsections. | |
69769 | 4787 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz |
4788 \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% | |
4789 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | |
4790 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | |
4791 } | |
4792 | |
4793 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz | |
4794 \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% | |
4795 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | |
4796 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% | |
4797 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | |
4798 } | |
4799 | |
4800 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz | |
4801 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% | |
4802 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | |
4803 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% | |
4804 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | |
37713 | 4805 } |
4806 | |
4807 % Subsubsections. | |
69769 | 4808 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz |
4809 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% | |
4810 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | |
4811 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% | |
4812 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | |
4813 } | |
4814 | |
4815 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz | |
4816 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% | |
4817 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | |
4818 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% | |
4819 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | |
4820 } | |
4821 | |
4822 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz | |
4823 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% | |
4824 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | |
4825 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% | |
4826 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | |
4827 } | |
37713 | 4828 |
4829 % These macros control what the section commands do, according | |
4830 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). | |
4831 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. | |
69769 | 4832 \let\section = \numberedsec |
4833 \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | |
4834 \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | |
37713 | 4835 |
4836 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading | |
4837 | |
4838 % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: | |
4839 % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit | |
4840 % overlong headings to fold. | |
4841 % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a | |
4842 % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. | |
4843 % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and | |
4844 % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. | |
4845 | |
4846 | |
69769 | 4847 \def\majorheading{% |
4848 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% | |
4849 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz | |
4850 } | |
4851 | |
4852 \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} | |
4853 \def\chapheadingzzz#1{% | |
4854 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | |
4855 \parindent=0pt\raggedright | |
4856 \rm #1\hfill}}% | |
4857 \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax | |
4858 \suppressfirstparagraphindent | |
4859 } | |
37713 | 4860 |
4861 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. | |
69769 | 4862 \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} |
4863 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
4864 \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | |
4865 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
4866 \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | |
4867 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
37713 | 4868 |
4869 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only | |
4870 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), | |
4871 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. | |
4872 | |
4873 %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) | |
4874 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} | |
4875 | |
4876 %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it | |
4877 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) | |
4878 | |
4879 \newskip\chapheadingskip | |
4880 | |
4881 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} | |
4882 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} | |
4883 \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi} | |
4884 | |
4885 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} | |
4886 | |
4887 \def\CHAPPAGoff{% | |
4888 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
4889 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak | |
4890 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} | |
4891 | |
4892 \def\CHAPPAGon{% | |
4893 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
4894 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager | |
4895 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager | |
4896 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} | |
4897 | |
69769 | 4898 \def\CHAPPAGodd{% |
37713 | 4899 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage |
4900 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage | |
4901 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage | |
4902 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} | |
4903 | |
4904 \CHAPPAGon | |
4905 | |
69769 | 4906 % Chapter opening. |
4907 % | |
4908 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, | |
4909 % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. | |
4910 % | |
4911 % To test against our argument. | |
4912 \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} | |
4913 \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} | |
4914 \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} | |
4915 % | |
4916 \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% | |
37713 | 4917 \pchapsepmacro |
4918 {% | |
4919 \chapfonts \rm | |
69769 | 4920 % |
4921 % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the | |
4922 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called | |
4923 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. | |
4924 \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
4925 \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% | |
4926 % | |
4927 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix | |
4928 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. | |
4929 \def\temptype{#2}% | |
4930 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword | |
4931 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | |
4932 \def\toctype{unnchap}% | |
71493 | 4933 \gdef\thischapternum{}% |
69769 | 4934 \gdef\thischapter{#1}% |
4935 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword | |
4936 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry | |
4937 \def\toctype{omit}% | |
71493 | 4938 \gdef\thischapternum{}% |
69769 | 4939 \gdef\thischapter{}% |
4940 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword | |
4941 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% | |
4942 \def\toctype{app}% | |
71493 | 4943 \xdef\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% |
69769 | 4944 % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter |
4945 % because we don't want its macros evaluated now. And we don't | |
4946 % use \thissection because that changes with each section. | |
4947 % | |
4948 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: | |
4949 \noexpand\thischaptername}% | |
4950 \else | |
4951 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% | |
4952 \def\toctype{numchap}% | |
71493 | 4953 \xdef\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% |
69769 | 4954 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: |
4955 \noexpand\thischaptername}% | |
4956 \fi\fi\fi | |
4957 % | |
4958 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the | |
4959 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc | |
4960 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. | |
4961 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% | |
4962 % | |
4963 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make | |
4964 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has | |
4965 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the | |
4966 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not | |
4967 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. | |
4968 \donoderef{#2}% | |
4969 % | |
4970 % Typeset the actual heading. | |
37713 | 4971 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright |
69769 | 4972 \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe |
37713 | 4973 \unhbox0 #1\par}% |
4974 }% | |
4975 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title | |
4976 \nobreak | |
4977 } | |
4978 | |
4979 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. | |
4980 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax | |
69769 | 4981 \def\centerparameters{% |
4982 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip | |
4983 \leftskip = \rightskip | |
4984 \parfillskip = 0pt | |
4985 } | |
4986 | |
4987 | |
4988 % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not | |
4989 % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. | |
4990 % | |
4991 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} | |
4992 % | |
37713 | 4993 \def\unnchfopen #1{% |
4994 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | |
4995 \parindent=0pt\raggedright | |
4996 \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak | |
4997 } | |
4998 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts | |
4999 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% | |
5000 \par\penalty 5000 % | |
5001 } | |
5002 \def\centerchfopen #1{% | |
5003 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | |
5004 \parindent=0pt | |
5005 \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak | |
5006 } | |
69769 | 5007 \def\CHAPFopen{% |
5008 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen | |
5009 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} | |
5010 | |
5011 | |
5012 % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and | |
5013 % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. | |
5014 % | |
37713 | 5015 \newskip\secheadingskip |
69769 | 5016 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} |
37713 | 5017 |
5018 % Subsection titles. | |
69769 | 5019 \newskip\subsecheadingskip |
5020 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} | |
37713 | 5021 |
5022 % Subsubsection titles. | |
69769 | 5023 \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} |
5024 \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} | |
5025 | |
5026 | |
5027 % Print any size, any type, section title. | |
5028 % | |
5029 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is | |
5030 % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the | |
5031 % section number. | |
5032 % | |
5033 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% | |
37713 | 5034 {% |
5035 % Switch to the right set of fonts. | |
69769 | 5036 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm |
5037 % | |
5038 % Insert space above the heading. | |
5039 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname | |
5040 % | |
5041 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. | |
5042 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% | |
5043 \def\temptype{#3}% | |
37713 | 5044 % |
69769 | 5045 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword |
5046 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | |
5047 \def\toctype{unn}% | |
5048 \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
5049 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword | |
5050 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, | |
5051 % and don't redefine \thissection. | |
5052 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | |
5053 \def\toctype{omit}% | |
5054 \let\sectionlevel=\empty | |
5055 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword | |
5056 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% | |
5057 \def\toctype{app}% | |
5058 \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
5059 \else | |
5060 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% | |
5061 \def\toctype{num}% | |
5062 \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
5063 \fi\fi\fi | |
5064 % | |
5065 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. | |
5066 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% | |
37713 | 5067 % |
69769 | 5068 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). |
5069 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. | |
5070 \donoderef{#3}% | |
5071 % | |
5072 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. | |
5073 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be | |
5074 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the | |
5075 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that | |
5076 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the | |
5077 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. | |
5078 \nobreak | |
5079 % | |
5080 % Output the actual section heading. | |
37713 | 5081 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright |
69769 | 5082 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number |
5083 \unhbox0 #1}% | |
37713 | 5084 }% |
69769 | 5085 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. |
5086 % Don't allow stretch, though. | |
5087 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname | |
5088 % | |
5089 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it | |
5090 % was followed by glue. | |
5091 \nobreak | |
5092 % | |
5093 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that | |
5094 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a | |
5095 % discardable item.) | |
5096 \vskip-\parskip | |
5097 % | |
5098 % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > | |
5099 % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after | |
5100 % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: | |
5101 % | |
5102 % @section sec-whatever | |
5103 % @deffn def-whatever | |
5104 \penalty 10001 | |
37713 | 5105 } |
5106 | |
5107 | |
5108 \message{toc,} | |
5109 % Table of contents. | |
5110 \newwrite\tocfile | |
5111 | |
5112 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. | |
69769 | 5113 % Called from @chapter, etc. |
5114 % | |
5115 % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} | |
5116 % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional | |
5117 % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually | |
5118 % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the | |
5119 % destination to jump to. | |
5120 % | |
5121 % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or | |
5122 % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. | |
5123 % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the | |
5124 % table of contents chapter openings themselves. | |
37713 | 5125 % |
5126 \newif\iftocfileopened | |
69769 | 5127 \def\omitkeyword{omit}% |
5128 % | |
5129 \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% | |
5130 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% | |
5131 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else | |
5132 \iftocfileopened\else | |
5133 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc | |
5134 \global\tocfileopenedtrue | |
5135 \fi | |
5136 % | |
5137 \iflinks | |
5138 {\atdummies | |
5139 \edef\temp{% | |
5140 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% | |
5141 \temp | |
5142 }% | |
5143 \fi | |
37713 | 5144 \fi |
69769 | 5145 % |
5146 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're | |
5147 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't | |
5148 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered | |
5149 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first | |
5150 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named | |
5151 % `1', and two named `2'. | |
5152 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi | |
5153 } | |
5154 | |
5155 | |
5156 % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman | |
5157 % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant | |
5158 % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. | |
5159 % | |
5160 \def\activecatcodes{% | |
5161 \catcode`\"=\active | |
5162 \catcode`\$=\active | |
5163 \catcode`\<=\active | |
5164 \catcode`\>=\active | |
5165 \catcode`\\=\active | |
5166 \catcode`\^=\active | |
5167 \catcode`\_=\active | |
5168 \catcode`\|=\active | |
5169 \catcode`\~=\active | |
5170 } | |
5171 | |
5172 | |
5173 % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. | |
5174 \def\readtocfile{% | |
5175 \setupdatafile | |
5176 \activecatcodes | |
78048 | 5177 \input \tocreadfilename |
37713 | 5178 } |
5179 | |
5180 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in | |
5181 \newcount\savepageno | |
5182 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 | |
5183 | |
69769 | 5184 % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. |
37713 | 5185 % |
5186 \def\startcontents#1{% | |
69769 | 5187 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should |
5188 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain | |
5189 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. | |
5190 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> | |
5191 \contentsalignmacro | |
5192 \immediate\closeout\tocfile | |
5193 % | |
5194 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. | |
5195 % It is abundantly clear what they are. | |
5196 \def\thischapter{}% | |
5197 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% | |
5198 % | |
5199 \savepageno = \pageno | |
5200 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. | |
5201 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. | |
5202 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. | |
5203 % | |
5204 % Roman numerals for page numbers. | |
5205 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi | |
37713 | 5206 } |
5207 | |
78048 | 5208 % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on |
5209 % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. | |
5210 % | |
5211 \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} | |
37713 | 5212 |
5213 % Normal (long) toc. | |
78048 | 5214 % |
37713 | 5215 \def\contents{% |
69769 | 5216 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% |
78048 | 5217 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space |
69769 | 5218 \ifeof 1 \else |
5219 \readtocfile | |
5220 \fi | |
5221 \vfill \eject | |
5222 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | |
5223 \ifeof 1 \else | |
5224 \pdfmakeoutlines | |
5225 \fi | |
5226 \closein 1 | |
5227 \endgroup | |
5228 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | |
5229 \global\pageno = \savepageno | |
37713 | 5230 } |
5231 | |
5232 % And just the chapters. | |
5233 \def\summarycontents{% | |
69769 | 5234 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% |
5235 % | |
5236 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry | |
5237 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry | |
5238 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry | |
5239 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. | |
5240 \secfonts | |
5241 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf | |
5242 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt | |
5243 \rm | |
5244 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 | |
5245 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. | |
5246 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} | |
5247 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry | |
5248 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry | |
5249 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
5250 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
5251 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
5252 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
5253 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
5254 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
78048 | 5255 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space |
69769 | 5256 \ifeof 1 \else |
5257 \readtocfile | |
5258 \fi | |
5259 \closein 1 | |
5260 \vfill \eject | |
5261 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | |
5262 \endgroup | |
5263 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | |
5264 \global\pageno = \savepageno | |
37713 | 5265 } |
5266 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents | |
5267 | |
69769 | 5268 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. |
5269 % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. | |
5270 % | |
5271 \def\shortchaplabel#1{% | |
5272 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the | |
5273 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. | |
5274 % But use \hss just in case. | |
5275 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after | |
5276 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) | |
5277 % | |
5278 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange | |
5279 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and | |
5280 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 | |
5281 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters | |
5282 % there are before deciding ... | |
5283 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% | |
5284 } | |
37713 | 5285 |
5286 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. | |
5287 % The first argument is the chapter or section name. | |
5288 % The last argument is the page number. | |
5289 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... | |
5290 | |
47284 | 5291 % Chapters, in the main contents. |
69769 | 5292 \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
47284 | 5293 % |
5294 % Chapters, in the short toc. | |
5295 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. | |
69769 | 5296 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% |
5297 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% | |
37713 | 5298 } |
5299 | |
47284 | 5300 % Appendices, in the main contents. |
69769 | 5301 % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. |
5302 % | |
5303 \def\appendixbox#1{% | |
5304 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. | |
5305 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% | |
5306 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} | |
5307 % | |
5308 \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} | |
47284 | 5309 |
5310 % Unnumbered chapters. | |
69769 | 5311 \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} |
5312 \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} | |
37713 | 5313 |
5314 % Sections. | |
69769 | 5315 \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
5316 \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry | |
5317 \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} | |
37713 | 5318 |
5319 % Subsections. | |
69769 | 5320 \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
5321 \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry | |
5322 \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} | |
37713 | 5323 |
5324 % And subsubsections. | |
69769 | 5325 \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
5326 \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry | |
5327 \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} | |
37713 | 5328 |
5329 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. | |
69769 | 5330 % Same as \defaultparindent. |
5331 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt | |
37713 | 5332 |
5333 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the | |
5334 % page number. | |
5335 % | |
5336 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters | |
5337 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. | |
5338 \def\dochapentry#1#2{% | |
5339 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip | |
5340 \begingroup | |
5341 \chapentryfonts | |
5342 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
5343 \endgroup | |
5344 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip | |
5345 } | |
5346 | |
5347 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup | |
5348 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent | |
5349 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
5350 \endgroup} | |
5351 | |
5352 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | |
5353 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent | |
5354 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
5355 \endgroup} | |
5356 | |
5357 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | |
5358 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent | |
5359 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | |
5360 \endgroup} | |
5361 | |
69769 | 5362 % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. |
5363 \let\tocentry = \entry | |
37713 | 5364 |
5365 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. | |
5366 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} | |
5367 | |
5368 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} | |
5369 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} | |
5370 | |
5371 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} | |
5372 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} | |
69769 | 5373 \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} |
5374 \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} | |
37713 | 5375 |
5376 | |
5377 \message{environments,} | |
5378 % @foo ... @end foo. | |
5379 | |
47284 | 5380 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5381 % |
37713 | 5382 % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of |
5383 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. | |
47284 | 5384 % |
37713 | 5385 \def\point{$\star$} |
5386 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} | |
5387 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} | |
5388 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} | |
5389 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} | |
5390 | |
47284 | 5391 % The @error{} command. |
37713 | 5392 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5393 % |
47284 | 5394 \newbox\errorbox |
5395 % | |
37713 | 5396 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. |
5397 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules | |
5398 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) | |
72317 | 5399 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt} |
47284 | 5400 % |
69769 | 5401 \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil |
37713 | 5402 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. |
5403 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. | |
69769 | 5404 \vbox{% |
37713 | 5405 \hrule height\dimen2 |
5406 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. | |
5407 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. | |
5408 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. | |
5409 \hrule height\dimen2} | |
5410 \hfil} | |
47284 | 5411 % |
37713 | 5412 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} |
5413 | |
5414 % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. | |
5415 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. | |
5416 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. | |
5417 | |
69769 | 5418 \envdef\tex{% |
37713 | 5419 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 |
5420 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 | |
69769 | 5421 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie |
37713 | 5422 \catcode `\%=14 |
69769 | 5423 \catcode `\+=\other |
5424 \catcode `\"=\other | |
5425 \catcode `\|=\other | |
5426 \catcode `\<=\other | |
5427 \catcode `\>=\other | |
37713 | 5428 \escapechar=`\\ |
5429 % | |
5430 \let\b=\ptexb | |
5431 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet | |
5432 \let\c=\ptexc | |
5433 \let\,=\ptexcomma | |
5434 \let\.=\ptexdot | |
5435 \let\dots=\ptexdots | |
5436 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv | |
5437 \let\!=\ptexexclam | |
5438 \let\i=\ptexi | |
69769 | 5439 \let\indent=\ptexindent |
5440 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent | |
37713 | 5441 \let\{=\ptexlbrace |
5442 \let\+=\tabalign | |
5443 \let\}=\ptexrbrace | |
69769 | 5444 \let\/=\ptexslash |
37713 | 5445 \let\*=\ptexstar |
5446 \let\t=\ptext | |
69769 | 5447 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing |
37713 | 5448 % |
5449 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% | |
5450 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% | |
5451 \def\@{@}% | |
69769 | 5452 } |
5453 % There is no need to define \Etex. | |
37713 | 5454 |
47284 | 5455 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp. |
69769 | 5456 % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, |
47284 | 5457 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). |
37713 | 5458 |
5459 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. | |
5460 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in | |
5461 | |
5462 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other | |
5463 % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't | |
5464 % have any width. | |
5465 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} | |
5466 | |
5467 % This space is always present above and below environments. | |
5468 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt | |
5469 | |
5470 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here | |
5471 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip | |
5472 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the | |
69769 | 5473 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. |
37713 | 5474 % |
47284 | 5475 \def\aboveenvbreak{{% |
69769 | 5476 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and |
5477 % \sectionheading, q.v. | |
5478 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else | |
47284 | 5479 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip |
5480 \endgraf | |
5481 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount | |
5482 \removelastskip | |
69769 | 5483 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak |
5484 % or better ... | |
5485 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi | |
47284 | 5486 \vskip\envskipamount |
5487 \fi | |
5488 \fi | |
5489 }} | |
37713 | 5490 |
5491 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak | |
5492 | |
69769 | 5493 % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will |
5494 % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. | |
37713 | 5495 \let\nonarrowing=\relax |
5496 | |
5497 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around | |
5498 % environment contents. | |
5499 \font\circle=lcircle10 | |
5500 \newdimen\circthick | |
5501 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner | |
5502 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip | |
5503 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle | |
5504 % | |
5505 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth | |
5506 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} | |
5507 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} | |
5508 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} | |
5509 \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | |
5510 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr | |
5511 \hskip\rskip}} | |
5512 \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | |
5513 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr | |
5514 \hskip\rskip}} | |
5515 % | |
5516 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip | |
5517 | |
69769 | 5518 \envdef\cartouche{% |
5519 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. | |
5520 \startsavinginserts | |
5521 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip | |
5522 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. | |
5523 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip | |
5524 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip | |
5525 \cartouter=\hsize | |
5526 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either | |
5527 % side, and for 6pt waste from | |
5528 % each corner char, and rule thickness | |
5529 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip | |
5530 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. | |
5531 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
5532 \vbox\bgroup | |
5533 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt | |
5534 \carttop | |
5535 \hbox\bgroup | |
5536 \hskip\lskip | |
5537 \vrule\kern3pt | |
5538 \vbox\bgroup | |
5539 \kern3pt | |
5540 \hsize=\cartinner | |
5541 \baselineskip=\normbskip | |
5542 \lineskip=\normlskip | |
5543 \parskip=\normpskip | |
5544 \vskip -\parskip | |
5545 \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. | |
5546 } | |
37713 | 5547 \def\Ecartouche{% |
69769 | 5548 \ifhmode\par\fi |
5549 \kern3pt | |
5550 \egroup | |
5551 \kern3pt\vrule | |
5552 \hskip\rskip | |
5553 \egroup | |
5554 \cartbot | |
5555 \egroup | |
5556 \checkinserts | |
5557 } | |
37713 | 5558 |
5559 | |
5560 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, | |
5561 % inside a group. | |
5562 \def\nonfillstart{% | |
5563 \aboveenvbreak | |
5564 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy | |
5565 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. | |
5566 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines | |
5567 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output | |
5568 \parskip = 0pt | |
5569 \parindent = 0pt | |
5570 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes | |
5571 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | |
5572 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing | |
5573 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing | |
69769 | 5574 \else |
5575 \let\nonarrowing = \relax | |
5576 \fi | |
5577 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent | |
5578 } | |
5579 | |
5580 % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. | |
5581 % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. | |
5582 % This affects the following displayed environments: | |
5583 % @example, @display, @format, @lisp | |
5584 % | |
5585 \def\smallword{small} | |
5586 \def\nosmallword{nosmall} | |
5587 \let\SETdispenvsize\relax | |
5588 \def\setnormaldispenv{% | |
5589 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword | |
77025 | 5590 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank |
5591 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but | |
5592 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient | |
5593 % to change the fonts afterward. | |
5594 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi | |
69769 | 5595 \smallexamplefonts \rm |
5596 \fi | |
5597 } | |
5598 \def\setsmalldispenv{% | |
5599 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword | |
5600 \else | |
77025 | 5601 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi |
69769 | 5602 \smallexamplefonts \rm |
37713 | 5603 \fi |
5604 } | |
5605 | |
69769 | 5606 % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. |
5607 % Let's do it by one command: | |
5608 \def\makedispenv #1#2{ | |
5609 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} | |
5610 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} | |
5611 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak | |
5612 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak | |
5613 } | |
5614 | |
5615 % Define two synonyms: | |
5616 \def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ | |
5617 \makedispenv{#1}{#3} | |
5618 \makedispenv{#2}{#3} | |
5619 } | |
5620 | |
5621 % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. | |
5622 % | |
5623 % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. | |
5624 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. | |
5625 % | |
5626 \maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% | |
37713 | 5627 \nonfillstart |
72317 | 5628 \tt\quoteexpand |
37713 | 5629 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. |
5630 \gobble % eat return | |
5631 } | |
69769 | 5632 % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. |
5633 % | |
5634 \makedispenv {display}{% | |
37713 | 5635 \nonfillstart |
5636 \gobble | |
5637 } | |
69769 | 5638 |
5639 % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. | |
5640 % | |
5641 \makedispenv{format}{% | |
5642 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
37713 | 5643 \nonfillstart |
5644 \gobble | |
5645 } | |
69769 | 5646 |
5647 % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. | |
5648 \envdef\flushleft{% | |
5649 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
5650 \nonfillstart | |
5651 \gobble | |
5652 } | |
5653 \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak | |
37713 | 5654 |
5655 % @flushright. | |
5656 % | |
69769 | 5657 \envdef\flushright{% |
5658 \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
37713 | 5659 \nonfillstart |
5660 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill | |
5661 \gobble | |
5662 } | |
69769 | 5663 \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak |
37713 | 5664 |
5665 | |
5666 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) | |
69769 | 5667 % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since |
5668 % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and | |
5669 % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. | |
5670 % | |
5671 \envdef\quotation{% | |
37713 | 5672 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip |
5673 \parindent=0pt | |
5674 % | |
5675 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. | |
5676 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | |
5677 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing | |
5678 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing | |
5679 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing | |
69769 | 5680 \else |
37713 | 5681 \let\nonarrowing = \relax |
5682 \fi | |
69769 | 5683 \parsearg\quotationlabel |
5684 } | |
5685 | |
5686 % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're | |
5687 % doing normal filling. | |
5688 % | |
5689 \def\Equotation{% | |
5690 \par | |
5691 \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else | |
5692 % indent a bit. | |
5693 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% | |
5694 \fi | |
5695 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% | |
5696 } | |
5697 | |
5698 % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. | |
5699 \def\quotationlabel#1{% | |
5700 \def\temp{#1}% | |
5701 \ifx\temp\empty \else | |
5702 {\bf #1: }% | |
5703 \fi | |
37713 | 5704 } |
5705 | |
5706 | |
5707 % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5708 % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, |
37713 | 5709 % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: |
5710 % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org | |
5711 % | |
5712 % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. | |
5713 % | |
69769 | 5714 % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets |
5715 % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a | |
5716 % verbatim line. | |
37713 | 5717 \def\dospecials{% |
69769 | 5718 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% |
5719 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% | |
5720 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% | |
5721 } | |
37713 | 5722 % |
5723 % [Knuth] p. 380 | |
5724 \def\uncatcodespecials{% | |
69769 | 5725 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} |
37713 | 5726 % |
5727 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 | |
5728 % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font | |
5729 \begingroup | |
5730 \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq} | |
5731 \endgroup | |
5732 % | |
5733 % Setup for the @verb command. | |
5734 % | |
5735 % Eight spaces for a tab | |
5736 \begingroup | |
5737 \catcode`\^^I=\active | |
5738 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} | |
5739 \endgroup | |
5740 % | |
5741 \def\setupverb{% | |
5742 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim | |
5743 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% | |
5744 \catcode`\`=\active | |
5745 \tabeightspaces | |
5746 % Respect line breaks, | |
5747 % print special symbols as themselves, and | |
5748 % make each space count | |
5749 % must do in this order: | |
5750 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | |
5751 } | |
5752 | |
5753 % Setup for the @verbatim environment | |
5754 % | |
5755 % Real tab expansion | |
5756 \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount | |
5757 % | |
5758 \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} | |
72317 | 5759 |
5760 % Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right | |
5761 % quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote | |
5762 % from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it | |
5763 % the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least | |
5764 % evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the | |
5765 % regular 0x27. | |
5766 % | |
74360 | 5767 \def\codequoteright{% |
78048 | 5768 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax |
5769 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax | |
5770 '% | |
5771 \else \char'15 \fi | |
5772 \else \char'15 \fi | |
72317 | 5773 } |
5774 % | |
74360 | 5775 % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. |
5776 % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like | |
5777 % the code environments to do likewise. | |
5778 % | |
5779 \def\codequoteleft{% | |
78048 | 5780 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax |
5781 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax | |
5782 `% | |
5783 \else \char'22 \fi | |
5784 \else \char'22 \fi | |
74360 | 5785 } |
5786 % | |
37713 | 5787 \begingroup |
5788 \catcode`\^^I=\active | |
5789 \gdef\tabexpand{% | |
5790 \catcode`\^^I=\active | |
5791 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup | |
5792 \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab | |
5793 \divide\dimen0 by\tabw | |
5794 \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw | |
5795 \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw | |
5796 \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox | |
5797 }% | |
5798 } | |
72317 | 5799 \catcode`\'=\active |
74360 | 5800 \gdef\rquoteexpand{\catcode\rquoteChar=\active \def'{\codequoteright}}% |
5801 % | |
5802 \catcode`\`=\active | |
5803 \gdef\lquoteexpand{\catcode\lquoteChar=\active \def`{\codequoteleft}}% | |
5804 % | |
5805 \gdef\quoteexpand{\rquoteexpand \lquoteexpand}% | |
37713 | 5806 \endgroup |
74360 | 5807 |
5808 % start the verbatim environment. | |
37713 | 5809 \def\setupverbatim{% |
69769 | 5810 \let\nonarrowing = t% |
5811 \nonfillstart | |
37713 | 5812 % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim |
5813 \tt | |
5814 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% | |
5815 \catcode`\`=\active | |
5816 \tabexpand | |
72317 | 5817 \quoteexpand |
37713 | 5818 % Respect line breaks, |
5819 % print special symbols as themselves, and | |
5820 % make each space count | |
5821 % must do in this order: | |
5822 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | |
5823 \everypar{\starttabbox}% | |
5824 } | |
5825 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5826 % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique |
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5827 % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a |
37713 | 5828 % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: |
5829 % | |
5830 % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} | |
5831 % | |
5832 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} | |
5833 \begingroup | |
69769 | 5834 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other |
37713 | 5835 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] |
5836 \endgroup | |
5837 % | |
5838 \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} | |
5839 % | |
5840 % | |
5841 % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that | |
5842 % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: | |
5843 % | |
5844 % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} | |
5845 % | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5846 % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, |
37713 | 5847 % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': |
69769 | 5848 % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. |
37713 | 5849 % |
5850 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] | |
69769 | 5851 % |
37713 | 5852 \begingroup |
5853 \catcode`\ =\active | |
69769 | 5854 \obeylines % |
5855 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end | |
5856 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank | |
5857 % line in the output. | |
5858 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% | |
5859 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but | |
5860 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. | |
37713 | 5861 \endgroup |
5862 % | |
69769 | 5863 \envdef\verbatim{% |
5864 \setupverbatim\doverbatim | |
5865 } | |
5866 \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak | |
5867 | |
37713 | 5868 |
5869 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. | |
5870 % | |
69769 | 5871 \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} |
37713 | 5872 % |
5873 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{% | |
69769 | 5874 {% |
5875 \makevalueexpandable | |
5876 \setupverbatim | |
5877 \input #1 | |
5878 \afterenvbreak | |
5879 }% | |
37713 | 5880 } |
5881 | |
47284 | 5882 % @copying ... @end copying. |
5883 % Save the text away for @insertcopying later. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
5884 % |
69769 | 5885 % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. |
5886 % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the | |
5887 % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done | |
5888 % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source | |
5889 % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as | |
5890 % possible is very desirable. | |
5891 % | |
5892 \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} | |
5893 \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} | |
5894 % | |
5895 \def\insertcopying{% | |
5896 \begingroup | |
5897 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page | |
5898 \scanexp\copyingtext | |
5899 \endgroup | |
5900 } | |
37713 | 5901 |
77025 | 5902 |
37713 | 5903 \message{defuns,} |
5904 % @defun etc. | |
5905 | |
5906 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in | |
5907 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt | |
5908 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt | |
77025 | 5909 \newcount\defunpenalty |
37713 | 5910 |
69769 | 5911 % Start the processing of @deffn: |
5912 \def\startdefun{% | |
5913 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 | |
5914 \medbreak | |
77025 | 5915 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the |
5916 % following @def command, see below. | |
69769 | 5917 \else |
5918 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, | |
5919 % which is there to keep the function description together with its | |
5920 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a | |
5921 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted | |
77025 | 5922 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning |
69769 | 5923 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow |
5924 % a break between a section heading and a defun. | |
77025 | 5925 % |
5926 % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling | |
5927 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the | |
5928 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following | |
5929 % @def command. | |
5930 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi | |
69769 | 5931 % |
5932 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. | |
5933 % But do insert the glue. | |
5934 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint | |
5935 \fi | |
47284 | 5936 % |
37713 | 5937 \parindent=0in |
5938 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent | |
5939 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | |
47284 | 5940 } |
5941 | |
69769 | 5942 \def\dodefunx#1{% |
5943 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: | |
5944 \checkenv#1% | |
5945 % | |
5946 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. | |
5947 % It's not a great place, though. | |
77025 | 5948 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi |
69769 | 5949 % |
5950 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: | |
5951 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% | |
5952 } | |
5953 \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} | |
5954 | |
5955 % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} | |
5956 % | |
5957 \def\printdefunline#1#2{% | |
37713 | 5958 \begingroup |
69769 | 5959 % call \deffnheader: |
5960 #1#2 \endheader | |
5961 % common ending: | |
5962 \interlinepenalty = 10000 | |
5963 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil | |
5964 \endgraf | |
5965 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip | |
77025 | 5966 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx |
69769 | 5967 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, |
5968 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. | |
5969 \checkparencounts | |
37713 | 5970 \endgroup |
5971 } | |
5972 | |
69769 | 5973 \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} |
5974 | |
5975 % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; | |
5976 % the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader. | |
5977 % | |
5978 \def\makedefun#1{% | |
5979 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun | |
5980 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun | |
5981 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% | |
5982 \temp | |
5983 } | |
5984 | |
5985 % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader | |
5986 % | |
5987 % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. | |
5988 % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. | |
5989 % | |
5990 \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% | |
5991 \envdef#1{% | |
5992 \startdefun | |
5993 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% | |
5994 }% | |
5995 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% | |
5996 \def#3% | |
5997 } | |
5998 | |
5999 %%% Untyped functions: | |
6000 | |
6001 % @deffn category name args | |
6002 \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} | |
6003 | |
6004 % @deffn category class name args | |
6005 \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} | |
6006 | |
6007 % \defopon {category on}class name args | |
6008 \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | |
6009 | |
6010 % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args | |
6011 % | |
6012 \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% | |
6013 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. | |
6014 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% | |
6015 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% | |
6016 } | |
6017 | |
6018 %%% Typed functions: | |
6019 | |
6020 % @deftypefn category type name args | |
6021 \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} | |
6022 | |
6023 % @deftypeop category class type name args | |
6024 \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} | |
6025 | |
6026 % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args | |
6027 \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | |
6028 | |
6029 % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args | |
6030 % | |
6031 \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% | |
6032 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% | |
6033 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% | |
6034 } | |
6035 | |
6036 %%% Typed variables: | |
6037 | |
6038 % @deftypevr category type var args | |
6039 \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} | |
6040 | |
6041 % @deftypecv category class type var args | |
6042 \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} | |
6043 | |
6044 % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args | |
6045 \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | |
6046 | |
6047 % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args | |
6048 % | |
6049 \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% | |
6050 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% | |
6051 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% | |
6052 } | |
6053 | |
6054 %%% Untyped variables: | |
6055 | |
6056 % @defvr category var args | |
6057 \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } | |
6058 | |
6059 % @defcv category class var args | |
6060 \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} | |
6061 | |
6062 % \defcvof {category of}class var args | |
6063 \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } | |
6064 | |
6065 %%% Type: | |
6066 % @deftp category name args | |
6067 \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% | |
6068 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% | |
6069 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% | |
6070 } | |
6071 | |
6072 % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: | |
6073 \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } | |
6074 \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } | |
6075 \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } | |
6076 \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } | |
6077 \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } | |
6078 \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } | |
6079 \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } | |
6080 \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} | |
6081 \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} | |
6082 \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} | |
6083 \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} | |
6084 | |
6085 % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). | |
6086 % #1 is the category, such as "Function". | |
6087 % #2 is the return type, if any. | |
6088 % #3 is the function name. | |
6089 % | |
6090 % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. | |
6091 % | |
6092 \def\defname#1#2#3{% | |
6093 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... | |
6094 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent | |
6095 % | |
6096 % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps | |
6097 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line | |
6098 % just below it. | |
6099 \def\temp{#1}% | |
6100 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} | |
6101 % | |
6102 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. | |
6103 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, | |
6104 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: | |
6105 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip | |
6106 % The continuations: | |
6107 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent | |
6108 % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) | |
6109 \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 | |
6110 % | |
6111 % Put the type name to the right margin. | |
6112 \noindent | |
6113 \hbox to 0pt{% | |
6114 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize | |
6115 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: | |
6116 \kern\leftskip | |
6117 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. | |
6118 }% | |
6119 % | |
6120 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: | |
6121 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 | |
6122 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | |
6123 {% | |
6124 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: | |
6125 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. | |
6126 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's | |
6127 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in | |
6128 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. | |
6129 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. | |
6130 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no | |
6131 % one has made identifiers using them :). | |
6132 \df \tt | |
6133 \def\temp{#2}% return value type | |
6134 \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi | |
6135 #3% output function name | |
6136 }% | |
6137 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm | |
6138 % | |
6139 \boldbrax | |
6140 % arguments will be output next, if any. | |
6141 } | |
6142 | |
6143 % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using | |
6144 % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in | |
6145 % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very | |
6146 % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. | |
6147 % | |
6148 \def\defunargs#1{% | |
6149 % use sl by default (not ttsl), | |
6150 % tt for the names. | |
6151 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 | |
6152 % | |
6153 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we | |
6154 % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. | |
6155 \let\var=\ttslanted | |
6156 #1% | |
6157 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 | |
6158 } | |
6159 | |
6160 % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. | |
6161 % | |
6162 \def\activeparens{% | |
6163 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active | |
6164 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active | |
6165 \catcode`\&=\active | |
6166 } | |
6167 | |
6168 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. | |
6169 \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) | |
6170 | |
6171 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, | |
6172 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, | |
6173 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. | |
6174 { | |
6175 \activeparens | |
6176 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen | |
6177 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack | |
6178 \global\let& = \& | |
6179 | |
6180 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} | |
6181 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} | |
6182 } | |
6183 | |
6184 \newcount\parencount | |
6185 | |
6186 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards | |
6187 \newif\ifampseen | |
6188 \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} | |
6189 | |
6190 \def\parenfont{% | |
6191 \ifampseen | |
6192 % At the first level, print parens in roman, | |
6193 % otherwise use the default font. | |
6194 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi | |
6195 \else | |
6196 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than | |
6197 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . | |
6198 \sf | |
6199 \fi | |
6200 } | |
6201 \def\infirstlevel#1{% | |
6202 \ifampseen | |
6203 \ifnum\parencount=1 | |
6204 #1% | |
6205 \fi | |
6206 \fi | |
6207 } | |
6208 \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} | |
6209 | |
6210 \def\opnr{% | |
6211 \global\advance\parencount by 1 | |
6212 {\parenfont(}% | |
6213 \infirstlevel \bfafterword | |
6214 } | |
6215 \def\clnr{% | |
6216 {\parenfont)}% | |
6217 \infirstlevel \sl | |
6218 \global\advance\parencount by -1 | |
6219 } | |
6220 | |
6221 \newcount\brackcount | |
6222 \def\lbrb{% | |
6223 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 | |
6224 {\bf[}% | |
6225 } | |
6226 \def\rbrb{% | |
6227 {\bf]}% | |
6228 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 | |
6229 } | |
6230 | |
6231 \def\checkparencounts{% | |
6232 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi | |
6233 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi | |
6234 } | |
6235 \def\badparencount{% | |
6236 \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}% | |
6237 \global\parencount=0 | |
6238 } | |
6239 \def\badbrackcount{% | |
6240 \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}% | |
6241 \global\brackcount=0 | |
6242 } | |
37713 | 6243 |
6244 | |
6245 \message{macros,} | |
6246 % @macro. | |
6247 | |
6248 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, | |
6249 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. | |
6250 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined | |
69769 | 6251 \newwrite\macscribble |
6252 \def\scantokens#1{% | |
6253 \toks0={#1}% | |
6254 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp | |
6255 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% | |
6256 \immediate\closeout\macscribble | |
6257 \input \jobname.tmp | |
6258 } | |
6259 \fi | |
6260 | |
37713 | 6261 \def\scanmacro#1{% |
69769 | 6262 \begingroup |
6263 \newlinechar`\^^M | |
6264 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces | |
6265 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex | |
6266 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active | |
6267 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had | |
6268 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears | |
6269 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 | |
6270 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ | |
6271 % ... and \example | |
6272 \spaceisspace | |
6273 % | |
6274 % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. | |
6275 % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX | |
6276 % --kasal, 29nov03 | |
6277 \scantokens{#1\endinput}% | |
6278 \endgroup | |
6279 } | |
6280 | |
6281 \def\scanexp#1{% | |
6282 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% | |
6283 \temp | |
6284 } | |
37713 | 6285 |
6286 \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters | |
6287 \newtoks\macname % Macro name | |
6288 \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? | |
69769 | 6289 |
6290 % List of all defined macros in the form | |
6291 % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... | |
6292 % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split | |
6293 % if there is a need. | |
6294 \def\macrolist{} | |
6295 | |
6296 % Add the macro to \macrolist | |
6297 \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} | |
6298 \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% | |
6299 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% | |
6300 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% | |
6301 } | |
37713 | 6302 |
6303 % Utility routines. | |
69769 | 6304 % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, |
6305 % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname | |
6306 % (except of course we have to play expansion games). | |
6307 % | |
37713 | 6308 \def\cslet#1#2{% |
69769 | 6309 \expandafter\let |
6310 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname | |
6311 \csname#2\endcsname | |
6312 } | |
37713 | 6313 |
6314 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. | |
6315 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). | |
6316 {\catcode`\@=11 | |
6317 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} | |
6318 \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} | |
6319 \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} | |
6320 \def\unbrace#1{#1} | |
6321 \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} | |
6322 } | |
6323 | |
6324 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. | |
69769 | 6325 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% |
37713 | 6326 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% |
6327 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% | |
6328 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% | |
6329 } | |
6330 | |
6331 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where | |
6332 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active | |
6333 % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. | |
6334 | |
6335 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is | |
6336 % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro | |
6337 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. | |
6338 | |
69769 | 6339 \def\scanctxt{% |
6340 \catcode`\"=\other | |
6341 \catcode`\+=\other | |
6342 \catcode`\<=\other | |
6343 \catcode`\>=\other | |
6344 \catcode`\@=\other | |
6345 \catcode`\^=\other | |
6346 \catcode`\_=\other | |
6347 \catcode`\|=\other | |
6348 \catcode`\~=\other | |
6349 } | |
6350 | |
6351 \def\scanargctxt{% | |
6352 \scanctxt | |
6353 \catcode`\\=\other | |
6354 \catcode`\^^M=\other | |
6355 } | |
6356 | |
37713 | 6357 \def\macrobodyctxt{% |
69769 | 6358 \scanctxt |
6359 \catcode`\{=\other | |
6360 \catcode`\}=\other | |
6361 \catcode`\^^M=\other | |
6362 \usembodybackslash | |
6363 } | |
37713 | 6364 |
6365 \def\macroargctxt{% | |
69769 | 6366 \scanctxt |
6367 \catcode`\\=\other | |
6368 } | |
37713 | 6369 |
6370 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. | |
6371 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N | |
6372 % where N is the macro parameter number. | |
6373 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so | |
6374 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. | |
6375 | |
6376 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active | |
6377 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} | |
6378 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} | |
6379 } | |
6380 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} | |
6381 | |
6382 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} | |
6383 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} | |
6384 | |
6385 \def\macroxxx#1{% | |
6386 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist | |
6387 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments | |
6388 \paramno=0% | |
6389 \else | |
6390 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% | |
6391 \fi | |
6392 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname | |
6393 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% | |
6394 \else | |
6395 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax | |
47284 | 6396 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi |
37713 | 6397 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% |
6398 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% | |
69769 | 6399 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% |
37713 | 6400 \fi |
6401 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt | |
6402 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody | |
6403 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody | |
6404 \fi} | |
6405 | |
69769 | 6406 \parseargdef\unmacro{% |
37713 | 6407 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname |
6408 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% | |
6409 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% | |
69769 | 6410 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: |
37713 | 6411 \begingroup |
69769 | 6412 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax |
6413 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo | |
6414 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% | |
37713 | 6415 \endgroup |
6416 \else | |
6417 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% | |
6418 \fi | |
6419 } | |
6420 | |
69769 | 6421 % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any |
6422 % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. | |
6423 % | |
6424 \def\unmacrodo#1{% | |
6425 \ifx #1\relax | |
6426 % remove this | |
6427 \else | |
6428 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% | |
6429 \fi | |
6430 } | |
6431 | |
37713 | 6432 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a |
6433 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by | |
6434 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. | |
6435 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} | |
6436 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} | |
6437 \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} | |
6438 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} | |
6439 | |
6440 % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist | |
6441 % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah | |
6442 % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. | |
6443 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). | |
6444 | |
6445 % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. | |
6446 % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something | |
6447 % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine | |
6448 % it to # just before using the token list produced. | |
6449 % | |
6450 % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before | |
6451 % the macro is used. | |
6452 | |
6453 \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% | |
6454 \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} | |
6455 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% | |
6456 \if#1;\let\next=\relax | |
6457 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx | |
6458 \advance\paramno by 1% | |
6459 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname | |
6460 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% | |
6461 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% | |
6462 \fi\next} | |
6463 | |
6464 % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. | |
6465 % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) | |
6466 | |
6467 \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% | |
6468 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | |
6469 \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% | |
6470 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | |
6471 | |
6472 % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and | |
6473 % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. | |
6474 % Much magic with \expandafter here. | |
6475 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file | |
6476 % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. | |
6477 \def\defmacro{% | |
6478 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars | |
6479 \ifrecursive | |
6480 \ifcase\paramno | |
6481 % 0 | |
6482 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6483 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | |
6484 \or % 1 | |
6485 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6486 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
6487 \noexpand\braceorline | |
6488 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | |
6489 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | |
6490 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | |
6491 \else % many | |
6492 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6493 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
6494 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | |
6495 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | |
6496 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | |
6497 \expandafter\expandafter | |
6498 \expandafter\xdef | |
6499 \expandafter\expandafter | |
6500 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | |
6501 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | |
6502 \fi | |
6503 \else | |
6504 \ifcase\paramno | |
6505 % 0 | |
6506 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6507 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | |
6508 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | |
6509 \or % 1 | |
6510 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6511 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
6512 \noexpand\braceorline | |
6513 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | |
6514 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | |
6515 \egroup | |
6516 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | |
6517 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | |
6518 \else % many | |
6519 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
6520 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
6521 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | |
6522 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | |
6523 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | |
6524 \expandafter\expandafter | |
6525 \expandafter\xdef | |
6526 \expandafter\expandafter | |
6527 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | |
6528 \paramlist{% | |
6529 \egroup | |
6530 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | |
6531 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | |
6532 \fi | |
6533 \fi} | |
6534 | |
6535 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} | |
6536 | |
6537 % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a | |
6538 % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole | |
6539 % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence | |
6540 % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) | |
69769 | 6541 \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} |
37713 | 6542 \def\braceorlinexxx{% |
6543 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else | |
6544 \expandafter\parsearg | |
69769 | 6545 \fi \macnamexxx} |
37713 | 6546 |
6547 | |
6548 % @alias. | |
6549 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal | |
6550 % sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. | |
69769 | 6551 \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} |
37713 | 6552 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} |
69769 | 6553 \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% |
6554 {% | |
6555 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty | |
6556 \addtomacrolist{#1}% | |
6557 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% | |
6558 }% | |
6559 \next | |
6560 } | |
37713 | 6561 |
6562 | |
6563 \message{cross references,} | |
6564 | |
6565 \newwrite\auxfile | |
6566 \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. | |
6567 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. | |
6568 | |
6569 % @inforef is relatively simple. | |
6570 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} | |
6571 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, | |
6572 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} | |
6573 | |
69769 | 6574 % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in |
6575 % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and | |
6576 % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: | |
6577 % @node foo , bar , ... | |
6578 % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. | |
6579 % | |
6580 \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} | |
6581 % | |
6582 % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: | |
6583 % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs | |
6584 \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} | |
6585 \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} | |
6586 | |
37713 | 6587 \let\nwnode=\node |
69769 | 6588 \let\lastnode=\empty |
6589 | |
6590 % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the | |
6591 % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). | |
6592 % | |
6593 \def\donoderef#1{% | |
6594 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else | |
6595 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% | |
6596 \global\let\lastnode=\empty | |
37713 | 6597 \fi |
6598 } | |
6599 | |
6600 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. | |
6601 % | |
6602 \newcount\savesfregister | |
69769 | 6603 % |
6604 \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} | |
6605 \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} | |
6606 \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} | |
6607 | |
6608 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an | |
6609 % anchor), which consists of three parts: | |
6610 % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection, | |
6611 % or the anchor name. | |
6612 % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or | |
6613 % empty for anchors. | |
6614 % 3) NAME-pg - the page number. | |
6615 % | |
6616 % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of | |
6617 % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: | |
6618 % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. | |
6619 % | |
6620 \def\setref#1#2{% | |
37713 | 6621 \pdfmkdest{#1}% |
69769 | 6622 \iflinks |
6623 {% | |
6624 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them | |
6625 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% | |
6626 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef | |
6627 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef | |
6628 }% | |
6629 \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}% | |
6630 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% | |
6631 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. | |
77025 | 6632 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout |
69769 | 6633 }% |
6634 \fi | |
6635 } | |
37713 | 6636 |
6637 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is | |
6638 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed | |
6639 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed | |
6640 % manual. All but the node name can be omitted. | |
6641 % | |
6642 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | |
6643 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | |
6644 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | |
6645 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup | |
6646 \unsepspaces | |
6647 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% | |
69769 | 6648 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% |
6649 \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% | |
6650 \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% | |
37713 | 6651 \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt |
6652 % No printed node name was explicitly given. | |
6653 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax | |
6654 % Use the node name inside the square brackets. | |
69769 | 6655 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
37713 | 6656 \else |
6657 % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside | |
6658 % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. | |
6659 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | |
6660 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. | |
69769 | 6661 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
37713 | 6662 \else |
6663 \ifhavexrefs | |
6664 % We know the real title if we have the xref values. | |
69769 | 6665 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% |
37713 | 6666 \else |
6667 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. | |
69769 | 6668 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
37713 | 6669 \fi% |
6670 \fi | |
6671 \fi | |
6672 \fi | |
6673 % | |
69769 | 6674 % Make link in pdf output. |
37713 | 6675 \ifpdf |
6676 \leavevmode | |
6677 \getfilename{#4}% | |
77025 | 6678 {\indexnofonts |
6679 \turnoffactive | |
69769 | 6680 % See comments at \activebackslashdouble. |
6681 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% | |
6682 \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}% | |
6683 % | |
47284 | 6684 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 |
6685 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | |
69769 | 6686 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% |
47284 | 6687 \else |
6688 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | |
69769 | 6689 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% |
47284 | 6690 \fi |
6691 }% | |
37713 | 6692 \linkcolor |
6693 \fi | |
6694 % | |
69769 | 6695 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" |
6696 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the | |
6697 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. | |
6698 {% | |
6699 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to | |
6700 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. | |
6701 \indexnofonts | |
6702 \turnoffactive | |
6703 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle | |
6704 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname | |
6705 }% | |
6706 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle | |
6707 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, | |
6708 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". | |
6709 \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt | |
6710 \refx{#1-snt}{}% | |
6711 \else | |
6712 \printedrefname | |
6713 \fi | |
6714 % | |
6715 % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append | |
6716 % "in MANUALNAME". | |
6717 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | |
6718 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% | |
6719 \fi | |
37713 | 6720 \else |
69769 | 6721 % node/anchor (non-float) references. |
6722 % | |
6723 % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not | |
6724 % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will | |
6725 % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals | |
6726 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this | |
6727 % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it | |
6728 % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. | |
6729 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | |
6730 \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% | |
6731 \else | |
6732 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the | |
6733 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand | |
6734 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of | |
6735 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the | |
6736 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. | |
6737 {\turnoffactive | |
6738 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for | |
6739 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. | |
6740 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% | |
6741 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi | |
6742 }% | |
6743 % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. | |
6744 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname | |
6745 % | |
6746 % But we always want a comma and a space: | |
6747 ,\space | |
6748 % | |
6749 % output the `page 3'. | |
6750 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% | |
6751 \fi | |
37713 | 6752 \fi |
6753 \endlink | |
6754 \endgroup} | |
6755 | |
69769 | 6756 % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref |
6757 % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, | |
6758 % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly | |
6759 % one that Bob is working on :). | |
6760 % | |
6761 \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} | |
6762 | |
6763 % Things referred to by \setref. | |
6764 % | |
37713 | 6765 \def\Ynothing{} |
69769 | 6766 \def\Yomitfromtoc{} |
6767 \def\Ynumbered{% | |
6768 \ifnum\secno=0 | |
6769 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno | |
6770 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 | |
6771 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno | |
6772 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 | |
6773 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno | |
6774 \else | |
6775 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno | |
6776 \fi\fi\fi | |
6777 } | |
6778 \def\Yappendix{% | |
6779 \ifnum\secno=0 | |
6780 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% | |
6781 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 | |
6782 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno | |
6783 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 | |
6784 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno | |
6785 \else | |
6786 \putwordSection@tie | |
6787 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno | |
6788 \fi\fi\fi | |
6789 } | |
37713 | 6790 |
6791 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. | |
6792 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. | |
69769 | 6793 % |
37713 | 6794 \def\refx#1#2{% |
69769 | 6795 {% |
6796 \indexnofonts | |
6797 \otherbackslash | |
6798 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX | |
6799 \csname XR#1\endcsname | |
6800 }% | |
6801 \ifx\thisrefX\relax | |
37713 | 6802 % If not defined, say something at least. |
6803 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright | |
6804 \iflinks | |
6805 \ifhavexrefs | |
6806 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% | |
6807 \else | |
6808 \ifwarnedxrefs\else | |
6809 \global\warnedxrefstrue | |
6810 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% | |
6811 \fi | |
6812 \fi | |
6813 \fi | |
6814 \else | |
6815 % It's defined, so just use it. | |
69769 | 6816 \thisrefX |
37713 | 6817 \fi |
6818 #2% Output the suffix in any case. | |
6819 } | |
6820 | |
69769 | 6821 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's |
6822 % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid | |
6823 % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. | |
6824 % | |
6825 \def\xrdef#1#2{% | |
77025 | 6826 {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current |
6827 % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these | |
6828 % mess up the control sequence name. | |
6829 \indexnofonts | |
6830 \turnoffactive | |
6831 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% | |
6832 }% | |
6833 % | |
6834 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref | |
69769 | 6835 % |
6836 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? | |
77025 | 6837 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname |
69769 | 6838 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. |
6839 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist | |
6840 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname | |
6841 % | |
6842 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? | |
6843 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax | |
6844 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do | |
6845 \else | |
6846 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. | |
6847 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% | |
6848 \fi | |
6849 % | |
6850 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, | |
6851 % for later use in \listoffloats. | |
77025 | 6852 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 |
6853 {\safexrefname}}% | |
69769 | 6854 \fi |
37713 | 6855 } |
6856 | |
6857 % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. | |
69769 | 6858 % |
6859 \def\tryauxfile{% | |
6860 \openin 1 \jobname.aux | |
6861 \ifeof 1 \else | |
6862 \readdatafile{aux}% | |
6863 \global\havexrefstrue | |
6864 \fi | |
6865 \closein 1 | |
6866 } | |
6867 | |
6868 \def\setupdatafile{% | |
37713 | 6869 \catcode`\^^@=\other |
6870 \catcode`\^^A=\other | |
6871 \catcode`\^^B=\other | |
6872 \catcode`\^^C=\other | |
6873 \catcode`\^^D=\other | |
6874 \catcode`\^^E=\other | |
6875 \catcode`\^^F=\other | |
6876 \catcode`\^^G=\other | |
6877 \catcode`\^^H=\other | |
6878 \catcode`\^^K=\other | |
6879 \catcode`\^^L=\other | |
6880 \catcode`\^^N=\other | |
6881 \catcode`\^^P=\other | |
6882 \catcode`\^^Q=\other | |
6883 \catcode`\^^R=\other | |
6884 \catcode`\^^S=\other | |
6885 \catcode`\^^T=\other | |
6886 \catcode`\^^U=\other | |
6887 \catcode`\^^V=\other | |
6888 \catcode`\^^W=\other | |
6889 \catcode`\^^X=\other | |
6890 \catcode`\^^Z=\other | |
6891 \catcode`\^^[=\other | |
6892 \catcode`\^^\=\other | |
6893 \catcode`\^^]=\other | |
6894 \catcode`\^^^=\other | |
6895 \catcode`\^^_=\other | |
69769 | 6896 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. |
37713 | 6897 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't |
6898 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, | |
6899 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ | |
6900 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat | |
6901 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first | |
6902 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could | |
6903 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. | |
6904 % | |
6905 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: | |
6906 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter | |
6907 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. | |
6908 % | |
69769 | 6909 \catcode`\^=\other |
6910 % | |
6911 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... | |
37713 | 6912 \catcode`\~=\other |
6913 \catcode`\[=\other | |
6914 \catcode`\]=\other | |
6915 \catcode`\"=\other | |
6916 \catcode`\_=\other | |
6917 \catcode`\|=\other | |
6918 \catcode`\<=\other | |
6919 \catcode`\>=\other | |
6920 \catcode`\$=\other | |
6921 \catcode`\#=\other | |
6922 \catcode`\&=\other | |
69769 | 6923 \catcode`\%=\other |
37713 | 6924 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off |
69769 | 6925 % |
6926 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ | |
6927 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than | |
6928 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ | |
6929 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* | |
6930 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that | |
6931 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for | |
6932 % now. --karl, 15jan04. | |
6933 \catcode`\\=\other | |
6934 % | |
6935 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. | |
37713 | 6936 {% |
69769 | 6937 \count1=128 |
37713 | 6938 \def\loop{% |
69769 | 6939 \catcode\count1=\other |
6940 \advance\count1 by 1 | |
6941 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi | |
37713 | 6942 }% |
6943 }% | |
69769 | 6944 % |
6945 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. | |
37713 | 6946 \catcode`\{=1 |
6947 \catcode`\}=2 | |
69769 | 6948 \catcode`\@=0 |
6949 } | |
6950 | |
6951 \def\readdatafile#1{% | |
6952 \begingroup | |
6953 \setupdatafile | |
6954 \input\jobname.#1 | |
37713 | 6955 \endgroup} |
6956 | |
77025 | 6957 |
69769 | 6958 \message{insertions,} |
6959 % including footnotes. | |
37713 | 6960 |
6961 \newcount \footnoteno | |
6962 | |
6963 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is | |
6964 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a | |
6965 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is | |
6966 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a | |
6967 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) | |
6968 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } | |
6969 | |
6970 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. | |
6971 \let\footnotestyle=\comment | |
6972 | |
6973 {\catcode `\@=11 | |
6974 % | |
6975 % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. | |
6976 \gdef\footnote{% | |
69769 | 6977 \let\indent=\ptexindent |
6978 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent | |
37713 | 6979 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne |
6980 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% | |
6981 % | |
6982 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the | |
6983 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. | |
6984 \let\@sf\empty | |
69769 | 6985 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi |
37713 | 6986 % |
6987 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. | |
6988 \unskip | |
6989 \thisfootno\@sf | |
69769 | 6990 \dofootnote |
37713 | 6991 }% |
6992 | |
6993 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the | |
6994 % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. | |
6995 % | |
69769 | 6996 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses |
6997 % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when | |
37713 | 6998 % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. |
6999 % | |
69769 | 7000 \gdef\dofootnote{% |
7001 \insert\footins\bgroup | |
37713 | 7002 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the |
7003 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. | |
7004 % So reset some parameters. | |
69769 | 7005 \hsize=\pagewidth |
37713 | 7006 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty |
7007 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes | |
7008 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox | |
7009 \floatingpenalty\@MM | |
7010 \leftskip\z@skip | |
7011 \rightskip\z@skip | |
7012 \spaceskip\z@skip | |
7013 \xspaceskip\z@skip | |
7014 \parindent\defaultparindent | |
7015 % | |
7016 \smallfonts \rm | |
7017 % | |
47284 | 7018 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears |
7019 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use | |
7020 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote | |
7021 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). | |
7022 \let\noindent = \relax | |
7023 % | |
7024 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the | |
7025 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. | |
7026 \everypar = {\hang}% | |
37713 | 7027 \textindent{\thisfootno}% |
7028 % | |
7029 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this | |
7030 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it | |
7031 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. | |
7032 \footstrut | |
7033 \futurelet\next\fo@t | |
7034 } | |
7035 }%end \catcode `\@=11 | |
7036 | |
69769 | 7037 % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create |
7038 % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion | |
7039 % would be lost. | |
7040 % Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote | |
7041 % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. | |
7042 % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. | |
7043 | |
7044 % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. | |
7045 % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled | |
7046 % out prematurely. | |
7047 % | |
7048 \def\startsavinginserts{% | |
7049 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert | |
7050 \let\insert\saveinsert | |
7051 \else | |
7052 \let\checkinserts\relax | |
7053 \fi | |
7054 } | |
7055 | |
7056 % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and | |
7057 % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. | |
7058 % | |
7059 \def\saveinsert#1{% | |
7060 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% | |
7061 \afterassignment\next | |
7062 % swallow the left brace | |
7063 \let\temp = | |
7064 } | |
7065 \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} | |
7066 \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} | |
7067 | |
7068 \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} | |
7069 | |
7070 \def\placesaveins#1{% | |
7071 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname | |
7072 {\box#1}% | |
7073 } | |
7074 | |
7075 % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: | |
7076 { | |
7077 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) | |
7078 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} | |
7079 } | |
7080 | |
7081 % initialization: | |
7082 \def\newsaveins #1{% | |
7083 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% | |
7084 \next | |
7085 } | |
7086 \def\newsaveinsX #1{% | |
7087 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% | |
7088 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts | |
7089 \checksaveins #1}% | |
7090 } | |
7091 | |
7092 % initialize: | |
7093 \let\checkinserts\empty | |
7094 \newsaveins\footins | |
7095 \newsaveins\margin | |
7096 | |
37713 | 7097 |
7098 % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. | |
7099 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. | |
7100 % | |
7101 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image | |
7102 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get | |
7103 % undone and the next image would fail. | |
7104 \openin 1 = epsf.tex | |
7105 \ifeof 1 \else | |
69769 | 7106 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in |
7107 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). | |
37713 | 7108 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% |
7109 \input epsf.tex | |
7110 \fi | |
69769 | 7111 \closein 1 |
37713 | 7112 % |
7113 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. | |
7114 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf | |
7115 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to | |
7116 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get | |
7117 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} | |
7118 % | |
7119 \def\image#1{% | |
7120 \ifx\epsfbox\undefined | |
7121 \ifwarnednoepsf \else | |
7122 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp | |
7123 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% | |
7124 \global\warnednoepsftrue | |
7125 \fi | |
7126 \else | |
47284 | 7127 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish |
37713 | 7128 \fi |
7129 } | |
7130 % | |
7131 % Arguments to @image: | |
7132 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. | |
7133 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. | |
47284 | 7134 % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. |
7135 % #5 is (ignored optional) extension. | |
7136 % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. | |
7137 \newif\ifimagevmode | |
7138 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup | |
7139 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example | |
7140 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names | |
7141 % If the image is by itself, center it. | |
7142 \ifvmode | |
7143 \imagevmodetrue | |
7144 \nobreak\bigskip | |
7145 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert | |
7146 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
7147 % above and below. |
47284 | 7148 \nobreak\vskip\parskip |
7149 \nobreak | |
69769 | 7150 \line\bgroup |
47284 | 7151 \fi |
7152 % | |
7153 % Output the image. | |
37713 | 7154 \ifpdf |
47284 | 7155 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% |
37713 | 7156 \else |
7157 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. | |
7158 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi | |
7159 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi | |
47284 | 7160 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% |
37713 | 7161 \fi |
47284 | 7162 % |
69769 | 7163 \ifimagevmode \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image |
47284 | 7164 \endgroup} |
37713 | 7165 |
7166 | |
69769 | 7167 % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, |
7168 % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the | |
7169 % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. | |
7170 % | |
7171 \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} | |
7172 | |
7173 % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. | |
7174 \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} | |
7175 | |
7176 % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically | |
7177 % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, | |
7178 % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. | |
7179 % | |
7180 % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to | |
7181 % be referable. | |
7182 % | |
7183 % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It | |
7184 % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). | |
7185 % | |
7186 % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each | |
7187 % chapter-level command. | |
7188 \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty | |
7189 % | |
7190 \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% | |
7191 \let\thiscaption=\empty | |
7192 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty | |
7193 % | |
7194 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. | |
7195 % | |
7196 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an | |
7197 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 | |
7198 % | |
7199 \startsavinginserts | |
7200 % | |
7201 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. | |
7202 \par | |
7203 % | |
7204 \vtop\bgroup | |
7205 \def\floattype{#1}% | |
7206 \def\floatlabel{#2}% | |
7207 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. | |
7208 % | |
7209 \ifx\floattype\empty | |
7210 \let\safefloattype=\empty | |
7211 \else | |
7212 {% | |
7213 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, | |
7214 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. | |
7215 \indexnofonts | |
7216 \turnoffactive | |
7217 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% | |
7218 }% | |
7219 \fi | |
7220 % | |
7221 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. | |
7222 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | |
7223 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, | |
7224 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) | |
7225 % | |
7226 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname | |
7227 \global\advance\floatno by 1 | |
7228 % | |
7229 {% | |
7230 % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the | |
7231 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float | |
7232 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from | |
7233 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the | |
7234 % lists of floats. | |
7235 % | |
7236 \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% | |
7237 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% | |
7238 }% | |
7239 \fi | |
7240 % | |
7241 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. | |
7242 \vskip\parskip | |
7243 % | |
7244 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. | |
7245 \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
7246 } | |
7247 | |
7248 % we have these possibilities: | |
7249 % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap | |
7250 % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 | |
7251 % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap | |
7252 % @float Foo & no caption: Foo | |
7253 % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap | |
7254 % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 | |
7255 % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap | |
7256 % @float & no caption: | |
7257 % | |
7258 \def\Efloat{% | |
7259 \let\floatident = \empty | |
7260 % | |
7261 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. | |
7262 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi | |
7263 % | |
7264 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. | |
7265 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | |
7266 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. | |
7267 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% | |
7268 \fi | |
7269 % the number. | |
7270 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% | |
7271 \fi | |
7272 % | |
7273 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in | |
7274 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. | |
7275 \let\captionline = \floatident | |
7276 % | |
7277 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else | |
7278 \ifx\floatident\empty \else | |
7279 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between | |
7280 \fi | |
7281 % | |
7282 % caption text. | |
7283 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% | |
7284 \fi | |
7285 % | |
7286 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. | |
7287 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. | |
7288 \ifx\captionline\empty \else | |
7289 \vskip.5\parskip | |
7290 \captionline | |
7291 % | |
7292 % Space below caption. | |
7293 \vskip\parskip | |
7294 \fi | |
7295 % | |
7296 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this | |
7297 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. | |
7298 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | |
7299 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as | |
7300 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short | |
7301 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. | |
7302 {% | |
7303 \atdummies | |
7304 % | |
7305 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M | |
7306 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so | |
7307 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. | |
7308 \scanexp{% | |
7309 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% | |
7310 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty | |
7311 \thiscaption | |
7312 \else | |
7313 \thisshortcaption | |
7314 \fi | |
7315 }% | |
7316 }% | |
7317 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident | |
7318 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% | |
7319 }% | |
7320 \fi | |
7321 \egroup % end of \vtop | |
7322 % | |
7323 % place the captured inserts | |
7324 % | |
7325 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning | |
7326 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly | |
7327 % float. --kasal, 26may04 | |
7328 % | |
7329 \checkinserts | |
7330 } | |
7331 | |
7332 % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. | |
7333 % | |
7334 \def\appendtomacro#1#2{% | |
7335 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% | |
7336 } | |
7337 | |
7338 % @caption, @shortcaption | |
7339 % | |
7340 \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} | |
7341 \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} | |
7342 \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} | |
7343 \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} | |
7344 | |
7345 % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are | |
7346 % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. | |
7347 \def\getfloatno#1{% | |
7348 \ifx#1\relax | |
7349 % Haven't seen this figure type before. | |
7350 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% | |
7351 % | |
7352 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. | |
7353 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos | |
7354 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% | |
7355 \fi | |
7356 \let\floatno#1% | |
7357 } | |
7358 | |
7359 % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref | |
7360 % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we | |
7361 % first read the @float command. | |
7362 % | |
7363 \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% | |
7364 | |
7365 % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can | |
7366 % distinguish floats from other xref types. | |
7367 \def\floatmagic{!!float!!} | |
7368 | |
7369 % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional | |
7370 % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic | |
7371 % \thissection value which we \setref above. | |
7372 % | |
7373 \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} | |
7374 % | |
7375 % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the | |
7376 % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. | |
7377 % | |
7378 \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% | |
7379 \def\temp{#1}% | |
7380 \def\iffloattype{#2}% | |
7381 \ifx\temp\floatmagic | |
7382 } | |
7383 | |
7384 % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. | |
7385 % | |
7386 \parseargdef\listoffloats{% | |
7387 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype | |
7388 {% | |
7389 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, | |
7390 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. | |
7391 \indexnofonts | |
7392 \turnoffactive | |
7393 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% | |
7394 }% | |
7395 % | |
7396 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. | |
7397 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax | |
7398 \ifhavexrefs | |
7399 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. | |
7400 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% | |
7401 \fi | |
7402 \else | |
7403 \begingroup | |
7404 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc | |
7405 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo | |
7406 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname | |
7407 \endgroup | |
7408 \fi | |
7409 } | |
7410 | |
7411 % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the | |
7412 % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the | |
7413 % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which | |
7414 % has the text we're supposed to typeset here. | |
7415 % | |
7416 % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since | |
7417 % they won't appear in the aux file). | |
7418 % | |
7419 \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} | |
7420 \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% | |
7421 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just | |
7422 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the | |
7423 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link | |
7424 % in pdf output. | |
7425 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% | |
7426 % | |
7427 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. | |
7428 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% | |
7429 \writeentry | |
7430 }} | |
7431 | |
77025 | 7432 |
37713 | 7433 \message{localization,} |
7434 | |
7435 % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after | |
7436 % @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything | |
78048 | 7437 % properly. Single argument is the language (de) or locale (de_DE) |
7438 % abbreviation. It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file. | |
7439 % | |
7440 { | |
7441 \catcode`\_ = \active | |
7442 \globaldefs=1 | |
7443 \parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup | |
7444 \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames | |
37713 | 7445 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. |
78048 | 7446 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. |
69769 | 7447 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex |
7448 \ifeof 1 | |
78048 | 7449 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}% |
69769 | 7450 \else |
7451 \input txi-#1.tex | |
7452 \fi | |
7453 \closein 1 | |
37713 | 7454 \endgroup |
78048 | 7455 \endgroup} |
7456 } | |
7457 % | |
7458 % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, | |
7459 % try txi-de.tex. | |
7460 % | |
7461 \def\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% | |
7462 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex | |
7463 \ifeof 1 | |
7464 \errhelp = \nolanghelp | |
7465 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% | |
7466 \else | |
7467 \input txi-#1.tex | |
7468 \fi | |
7469 \closein 1 | |
7470 } | |
7471 % | |
37713 | 7472 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or |
7473 is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory | |
7474 should work if nowhere else does.} | |
7475 | |
77025 | 7476 % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. |
7477 % | |
7478 \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% | |
7479 \count255=128 | |
7480 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 | |
7481 \global\catcode\count255=#1 | |
7482 \advance\count255 by 1 | |
7483 \repeat | |
7484 } | |
7485 | |
7486 % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters | |
7487 % according to the specified encoding. | |
7488 % | |
7489 \parseargdef\documentencoding{% | |
7490 % Encoding being declared for the document. | |
7491 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% | |
7492 % | |
7493 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able | |
7494 % to compare them with \ifx. | |
7495 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% | |
7496 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% | |
7497 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% | |
7498 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% | |
7499 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% | |
7500 % | |
7501 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii | |
7502 \asciichardefs | |
7503 % | |
7504 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo | |
7505 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active | |
7506 \lattwochardefs | |
7507 % | |
7508 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone | |
7509 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active | |
7510 \latonechardefs | |
7511 % | |
7512 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine | |
7513 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active | |
7514 \latninechardefs | |
7515 % | |
7516 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight | |
7517 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active | |
7518 \utfeightchardefs | |
7519 % | |
7520 \else | |
7521 \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}% | |
7522 % | |
7523 \fi % utfeight | |
7524 \fi % latnine | |
7525 \fi % latone | |
7526 \fi % lattwo | |
7527 \fi % ascii | |
7528 } | |
7529 | |
7530 % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available | |
7531 % the default font encoding (OT1). | |
7532 % | |
7533 \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}} | |
7534 | |
7535 % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. | |
7536 \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} | |
7537 | |
7538 % First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be | |
7539 % correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of | |
7540 % macros containing the character definitions. | |
7541 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active | |
7542 % | |
7543 % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. | |
7544 \def\latonechardefs{% | |
7545 \gdef^^a0{~} | |
7546 \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown} | |
7547 \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}} | |
7548 \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}} | |
7549 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} | |
7550 \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}} | |
7551 \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}} | |
7552 \gdef^^a7{\S} | |
7553 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} | |
7554 \gdef^^a9{\copyright} | |
7555 \gdef^^aa{\ordf} | |
7556 \gdef^^ab{\missingcharmsg{LEFT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}} | |
7557 \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$} | |
7558 \gdef^^ad{\-} | |
7559 \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol} | |
7560 \gdef^^af{\={}} | |
7561 % | |
7562 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} | |
7563 \gdef^^b1{$\pm$} | |
7564 \gdef^^b2{$^2$} | |
7565 \gdef^^b3{$^3$} | |
7566 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} | |
7567 \gdef^^b5{$\mu$} | |
7568 \gdef^^b6{\P} | |
7569 % | |
7570 \gdef^^b7{$^.$} | |
7571 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } | |
7572 \gdef^^b9{$^1$} | |
7573 \gdef^^ba{\ordm} | |
7574 % | |
7575 \gdef^^bb{\missingcharmsg{RIGHT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}} | |
7576 \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$} | |
7577 \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$} | |
7578 \gdef^^be{$3\over4$} | |
7579 \gdef^^bf{\questiondown} | |
7580 % | |
7581 \gdef^^c0{\`A} | |
7582 \gdef^^c1{\'A} | |
7583 \gdef^^c2{\^A} | |
7584 \gdef^^c3{\~A} | |
7585 \gdef^^c4{\"A} | |
7586 \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A} | |
7587 \gdef^^c6{\AE} | |
7588 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} | |
7589 \gdef^^c8{\`E} | |
7590 \gdef^^c9{\'E} | |
7591 \gdef^^ca{\^E} | |
7592 \gdef^^cb{\"E} | |
7593 \gdef^^cc{\`I} | |
7594 \gdef^^cd{\'I} | |
7595 \gdef^^ce{\^I} | |
7596 \gdef^^cf{\"I} | |
7597 % | |
7598 \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH}} | |
7599 \gdef^^d1{\~N} | |
7600 \gdef^^d2{\`O} | |
7601 \gdef^^d3{\'O} | |
7602 \gdef^^d4{\^O} | |
7603 \gdef^^d5{\~O} | |
7604 \gdef^^d6{\"O} | |
7605 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} | |
7606 \gdef^^d8{\O} | |
7607 \gdef^^d9{\`U} | |
7608 \gdef^^da{\'U} | |
7609 \gdef^^db{\^U} | |
7610 \gdef^^dc{\"U} | |
7611 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} | |
7612 \gdef^^de{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN}} | |
7613 \gdef^^df{\ss} | |
7614 % | |
7615 \gdef^^e0{\`a} | |
7616 \gdef^^e1{\'a} | |
7617 \gdef^^e2{\^a} | |
7618 \gdef^^e3{\~a} | |
7619 \gdef^^e4{\"a} | |
7620 \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a} | |
7621 \gdef^^e6{\ae} | |
7622 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} | |
7623 \gdef^^e8{\`e} | |
7624 \gdef^^e9{\'e} | |
7625 \gdef^^ea{\^e} | |
7626 \gdef^^eb{\"e} | |
7627 \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} | |
7628 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} | |
7629 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} | |
7630 \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} | |
7631 % | |
7632 \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH}} | |
7633 \gdef^^f1{\~n} | |
7634 \gdef^^f2{\`o} | |
7635 \gdef^^f3{\'o} | |
7636 \gdef^^f4{\^o} | |
7637 \gdef^^f5{\~o} | |
7638 \gdef^^f6{\"o} | |
7639 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} | |
7640 \gdef^^f8{\o} | |
7641 \gdef^^f9{\`u} | |
7642 \gdef^^fa{\'u} | |
7643 \gdef^^fb{\^u} | |
7644 \gdef^^fc{\"u} | |
7645 \gdef^^fd{\'y} | |
7646 \gdef^^fe{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN}} | |
7647 \gdef^^ff{\"y} | |
7648 } | |
7649 | |
7650 % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. | |
7651 \def\latninechardefs{% | |
7652 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. | |
7653 \latonechardefs | |
7654 % | |
7655 \gdef^^a4{\euro} | |
7656 \gdef^^a6{\v S} | |
7657 \gdef^^a8{\v s} | |
7658 \gdef^^b4{\v Z} | |
7659 \gdef^^b8{\v z} | |
7660 \gdef^^bc{\OE} | |
7661 \gdef^^bd{\oe} | |
7662 \gdef^^be{\"Y} | |
7663 } | |
7664 | |
7665 % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. | |
7666 \def\lattwochardefs{% | |
7667 \gdef^^a0{~} | |
7668 \gdef^^a1{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}} | |
7669 \gdef^^a2{\u{}} | |
7670 \gdef^^a3{\L} | |
7671 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} | |
7672 \gdef^^a5{\v L} | |
7673 \gdef^^a6{\'S} | |
7674 \gdef^^a7{\S} | |
7675 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} | |
7676 \gdef^^a9{\v S} | |
7677 \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S} | |
7678 \gdef^^ab{\v T} | |
7679 \gdef^^ac{\'Z} | |
7680 \gdef^^ad{\-} | |
7681 \gdef^^ae{\v Z} | |
7682 \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z} | |
7683 % | |
7684 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} | |
7685 \gdef^^b1{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}} | |
7686 \gdef^^b2{\missingcharmsg{OGONEK}} | |
7687 \gdef^^b3{\l} | |
7688 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} | |
7689 \gdef^^b5{\v l} | |
7690 \gdef^^b6{\'s} | |
7691 \gdef^^b7{\v{}} | |
7692 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } | |
7693 \gdef^^b9{\v s} | |
7694 \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s} | |
7695 \gdef^^bb{\v t} | |
7696 \gdef^^bc{\'z} | |
7697 \gdef^^bd{\H{}} | |
7698 \gdef^^be{\v z} | |
7699 \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z} | |
7700 % | |
7701 \gdef^^c0{\'R} | |
7702 \gdef^^c1{\'A} | |
7703 \gdef^^c2{\^A} | |
7704 \gdef^^c3{\u A} | |
7705 \gdef^^c4{\"A} | |
7706 \gdef^^c5{\'L} | |
7707 \gdef^^c6{\'C} | |
7708 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} | |
7709 \gdef^^c8{\v C} | |
7710 \gdef^^c9{\'E} | |
7711 \gdef^^ca{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}} | |
7712 \gdef^^cb{\"E} | |
7713 \gdef^^cc{\v E} | |
7714 \gdef^^cd{\'I} | |
7715 \gdef^^ce{\^I} | |
7716 \gdef^^cf{\v D} | |
7717 % | |
7718 \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE}} | |
7719 \gdef^^d1{\'N} | |
7720 \gdef^^d2{\v N} | |
7721 \gdef^^d3{\'O} | |
7722 \gdef^^d4{\^O} | |
7723 \gdef^^d5{\H O} | |
7724 \gdef^^d6{\"O} | |
7725 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} | |
7726 \gdef^^d8{\v R} | |
7727 \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U} | |
7728 \gdef^^da{\'U} | |
7729 \gdef^^db{\H U} | |
7730 \gdef^^dc{\"U} | |
7731 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} | |
7732 \gdef^^de{\cedilla T} | |
7733 \gdef^^df{\ss} | |
7734 % | |
7735 \gdef^^e0{\'r} | |
7736 \gdef^^e1{\'a} | |
7737 \gdef^^e2{\^a} | |
7738 \gdef^^e3{\u a} | |
7739 \gdef^^e4{\"a} | |
7740 \gdef^^e5{\'l} | |
7741 \gdef^^e6{\'c} | |
7742 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} | |
7743 \gdef^^e8{\v c} | |
7744 \gdef^^e9{\'e} | |
7745 \gdef^^ea{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}} | |
7746 \gdef^^eb{\"e} | |
7747 \gdef^^ec{\v e} | |
7748 \gdef^^ed{\'\i} | |
7749 \gdef^^ee{\^\i} | |
7750 \gdef^^ef{\v d} | |
7751 % | |
7752 \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE}} | |
7753 \gdef^^f1{\'n} | |
7754 \gdef^^f2{\v n} | |
7755 \gdef^^f3{\'o} | |
7756 \gdef^^f4{\^o} | |
7757 \gdef^^f5{\H o} | |
7758 \gdef^^f6{\"o} | |
7759 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} | |
7760 \gdef^^f8{\v r} | |
7761 \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u} | |
7762 \gdef^^fa{\'u} | |
7763 \gdef^^fb{\H u} | |
7764 \gdef^^fc{\"u} | |
7765 \gdef^^fd{\'y} | |
7766 \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t} | |
7767 \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}} | |
7768 } | |
7769 | |
7770 % UTF-8 character definitions. | |
7771 % | |
7772 % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some | |
7773 % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by | |
7774 % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. | |
7775 % | |
7776 \newcount\countUTFx | |
7777 \newcount\countUTFy | |
7778 \newcount\countUTFz | |
7779 | |
7780 \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter | |
7781 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} | |
7782 % | |
7783 \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter | |
7784 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} | |
7785 % | |
7786 \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter | |
7787 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} | |
7788 | |
7789 \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% | |
7790 \ifx #1\relax | |
7791 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% | |
7792 \else | |
7793 \expandafter #1% | |
7794 \fi | |
7795 } | |
7796 | |
7797 \begingroup | |
7798 \catcode`\~13 | |
7799 \catcode`\"12 | |
7800 | |
7801 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% | |
7802 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active | |
7803 \uccode`\~\countUTFx | |
7804 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% | |
7805 \advance\countUTFx by 1 | |
7806 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy | |
7807 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop | |
7808 \fi} | |
7809 | |
7810 \countUTFx = "C2 | |
7811 \countUTFy = "E0 | |
7812 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% | |
7813 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}} | |
7814 \UTFviiiLoop | |
7815 | |
7816 \countUTFx = "E0 | |
7817 \countUTFy = "F0 | |
7818 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% | |
7819 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}} | |
7820 \UTFviiiLoop | |
7821 | |
7822 \countUTFx = "F0 | |
7823 \countUTFy = "F4 | |
7824 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% | |
7825 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}} | |
7826 \UTFviiiLoop | |
7827 \endgroup | |
7828 | |
7829 \begingroup | |
7830 \catcode`\"=12 | |
7831 \catcode`\<=12 | |
7832 \catcode`\.=12 | |
7833 \catcode`\,=12 | |
7834 \catcode`\;=12 | |
7835 \catcode`\!=12 | |
7836 \catcode`\~=13 | |
7837 | |
7838 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{% | |
7839 \countUTFz = "#1\relax | |
7840 \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}% | |
7841 \begingroup | |
7842 \parseXMLCharref | |
7843 \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{% | |
7844 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}% | |
7845 \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{% | |
7846 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}% | |
7847 \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{% | |
7848 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}% | |
7849 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter | |
7850 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter | |
7851 \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}% | |
7852 \endgroup} | |
7853 | |
7854 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% | |
7855 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax | |
7856 \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
7857 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% | |
7858 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax | |
7859 \parseUTFviiiA,% | |
7860 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,% | |
7861 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax | |
7862 \parseUTFviiiA;% | |
7863 \parseUTFviiiA,% | |
7864 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}% | |
7865 \else | |
7866 \parseUTFviiiA;% | |
7867 \parseUTFviiiA,% | |
7868 \parseUTFviiiA!% | |
7869 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}% | |
7870 \fi\fi\fi | |
7871 } | |
7872 | |
7873 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% | |
7874 \countUTFx = \countUTFz | |
7875 \divide\countUTFz by 64 | |
7876 \countUTFy = \countUTFz | |
7877 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 | |
7878 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz | |
7879 \advance\countUTFx by 128 | |
7880 \uccode `#1\countUTFx | |
7881 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} | |
7882 | |
7883 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% | |
7884 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax | |
7885 \uccode `#3\countUTFz | |
7886 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} | |
7887 \endgroup | |
7888 | |
7889 \def\utfeightchardefs{% | |
7890 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie} | |
7891 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown} | |
7892 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds} | |
7893 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }} | |
7894 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright} | |
7895 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf} | |
7896 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-} | |
7897 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol} | |
7898 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }} | |
7899 | |
7900 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }} | |
7901 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }} | |
7902 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }} | |
7903 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm} | |
7904 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown} | |
7905 | |
7906 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A} | |
7907 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A} | |
7908 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A} | |
7909 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A} | |
7910 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A} | |
7911 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA} | |
7912 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE} | |
7913 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}} | |
7914 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E} | |
7915 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E} | |
7916 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E} | |
7917 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E} | |
7918 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I} | |
7919 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I} | |
7920 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I} | |
7921 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I} | |
7922 | |
7923 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N} | |
7924 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O} | |
7925 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O} | |
7926 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O} | |
7927 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O} | |
7928 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O} | |
7929 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O} | |
7930 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U} | |
7931 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U} | |
7932 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U} | |
7933 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U} | |
7934 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y} | |
7935 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss} | |
7936 | |
7937 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a} | |
7938 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a} | |
7939 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a} | |
7940 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a} | |
7941 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a} | |
7942 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa} | |
7943 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae} | |
7944 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}} | |
7945 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e} | |
7946 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e} | |
7947 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e} | |
7948 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e} | |
7949 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}} | |
7950 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}} | |
7951 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}} | |
7952 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}} | |
7953 | |
7954 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n} | |
7955 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o} | |
7956 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o} | |
7957 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o} | |
7958 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o} | |
7959 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o} | |
7960 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o} | |
7961 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u} | |
7962 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u} | |
7963 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u} | |
7964 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u} | |
7965 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y} | |
7966 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y} | |
7967 | |
7968 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A} | |
7969 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a} | |
7970 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}} | |
7971 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}} | |
7972 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C} | |
7973 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c} | |
7974 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C} | |
7975 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c} | |
7976 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}} | |
7977 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}} | |
7978 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}} | |
7979 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}} | |
7980 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}} | |
7981 | |
7982 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E} | |
7983 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e} | |
7984 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}} | |
7985 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}} | |
7986 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}} | |
7987 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}} | |
7988 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}} | |
7989 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}} | |
7990 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G} | |
7991 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g} | |
7992 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}} | |
7993 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}} | |
7994 | |
7995 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}} | |
7996 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}} | |
7997 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H} | |
7998 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h} | |
7999 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I} | |
8000 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}} | |
8001 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I} | |
8002 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}} | |
8003 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}} | |
8004 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}} | |
8005 | |
8006 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}} | |
8007 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}} | |
8008 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ} | |
8009 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij} | |
8010 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J} | |
8011 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}} | |
8012 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L} | |
8013 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l} | |
8014 | |
8015 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L} | |
8016 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l} | |
8017 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N} | |
8018 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n} | |
8019 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}} | |
8020 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}} | |
8021 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O} | |
8022 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o} | |
8023 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}} | |
8024 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}} | |
8025 | |
8026 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}} | |
8027 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}} | |
8028 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE} | |
8029 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe} | |
8030 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R} | |
8031 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r} | |
8032 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}} | |
8033 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}} | |
8034 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S} | |
8035 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s} | |
8036 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S} | |
8037 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s} | |
8038 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}} | |
8039 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}} | |
8040 | |
8041 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}} | |
8042 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}} | |
8043 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}} | |
8044 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}} | |
8045 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}} | |
8046 | |
8047 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U} | |
8048 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u} | |
8049 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U} | |
8050 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u} | |
8051 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}} | |
8052 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}} | |
8053 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}} | |
8054 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}} | |
8055 | |
8056 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}} | |
8057 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}} | |
8058 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W} | |
8059 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w} | |
8060 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y} | |
8061 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y} | |
8062 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y} | |
8063 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z} | |
8064 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z} | |
8065 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}} | |
8066 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}} | |
8067 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}} | |
8068 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}} | |
8069 | |
8070 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}} | |
8071 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}} | |
8072 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}} | |
8073 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ} | |
8074 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj} | |
8075 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj} | |
8076 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ} | |
8077 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj} | |
8078 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj} | |
8079 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}} | |
8080 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}} | |
8081 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}} | |
8082 | |
8083 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}} | |
8084 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}} | |
8085 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}} | |
8086 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}} | |
8087 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}} | |
8088 | |
8089 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}} | |
8090 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}} | |
8091 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}} | |
8092 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}} | |
8093 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}} | |
8094 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}} | |
8095 | |
8096 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}} | |
8097 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ} | |
8098 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz} | |
8099 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz} | |
8100 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G} | |
8101 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g} | |
8102 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N} | |
8103 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n} | |
8104 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}} | |
8105 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}} | |
8106 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}} | |
8107 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}} | |
8108 | |
8109 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}} | |
8110 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}} | |
8111 | |
8112 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}} | |
8113 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}} | |
8114 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}} | |
8115 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}} | |
8116 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}} | |
8117 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}} | |
8118 | |
8119 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y} | |
8120 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y} | |
8121 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}} | |
8122 | |
8123 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}} | |
8124 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}} | |
8125 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}} | |
8126 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}} | |
8127 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}} | |
8128 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}} | |
8129 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}} | |
8130 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}} | |
8131 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}} | |
8132 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}} | |
8133 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}} | |
8134 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}} | |
8135 | |
8136 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}} | |
8137 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}} | |
8138 | |
8139 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G} | |
8140 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g} | |
8141 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}} | |
8142 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}} | |
8143 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}} | |
8144 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}} | |
8145 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H} | |
8146 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h} | |
8147 | |
8148 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K} | |
8149 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k} | |
8150 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}} | |
8151 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}} | |
8152 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}} | |
8153 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}} | |
8154 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}} | |
8155 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}} | |
8156 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}} | |
8157 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}} | |
8158 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M} | |
8159 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m} | |
8160 | |
8161 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}} | |
8162 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}} | |
8163 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}} | |
8164 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}} | |
8165 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}} | |
8166 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}} | |
8167 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}} | |
8168 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}} | |
8169 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}} | |
8170 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}} | |
8171 | |
8172 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P} | |
8173 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p} | |
8174 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}} | |
8175 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}} | |
8176 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}} | |
8177 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}} | |
8178 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}} | |
8179 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}} | |
8180 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}} | |
8181 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}} | |
8182 | |
8183 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}} | |
8184 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}} | |
8185 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}} | |
8186 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}} | |
8187 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}} | |
8188 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}} | |
8189 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}} | |
8190 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}} | |
8191 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}} | |
8192 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}} | |
8193 | |
8194 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V} | |
8195 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v} | |
8196 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}} | |
8197 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}} | |
8198 | |
8199 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W} | |
8200 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w} | |
8201 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W} | |
8202 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w} | |
8203 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W} | |
8204 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w} | |
8205 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}} | |
8206 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}} | |
8207 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}} | |
8208 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}} | |
8209 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}} | |
8210 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}} | |
8211 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X} | |
8212 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x} | |
8213 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}} | |
8214 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}} | |
8215 | |
8216 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z} | |
8217 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z} | |
8218 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}} | |
8219 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}} | |
8220 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}} | |
8221 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}} | |
8222 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}} | |
8223 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t} | |
8224 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}} | |
8225 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}} | |
8226 | |
8227 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}} | |
8228 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}} | |
8229 | |
8230 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}} | |
8231 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}} | |
8232 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E} | |
8233 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e} | |
8234 | |
8235 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}} | |
8236 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}} | |
8237 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}} | |
8238 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}} | |
8239 | |
8240 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}} | |
8241 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}} | |
8242 | |
8243 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y} | |
8244 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y} | |
8245 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}} | |
8246 | |
8247 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y} | |
8248 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y} | |
8249 | |
8250 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--} | |
8251 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---} | |
8252 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet} | |
8253 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots} | |
8254 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro} | |
8255 | |
8256 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion} | |
8257 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result} | |
8258 | |
8259 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus} | |
8260 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point} | |
8261 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv} | |
8262 }% end of \utfeightchardefs | |
8263 | |
8264 | |
8265 % US-ASCII character definitions. | |
8266 \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done | |
8267 \relax | |
8268 } | |
8269 | |
8270 % Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with | |
8271 % existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a | |
8272 % document encoding. | |
8273 % | |
8274 \setnonasciicharscatcode \other | |
8275 | |
8276 | |
8277 \message{formatting,} | |
8278 | |
37713 | 8279 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt |
8280 | |
8281 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt | |
8282 \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt | |
8283 \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt | |
8284 | |
8285 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. | |
8286 \vbadness = 10000 | |
8287 | |
8288 % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. | |
8289 \hbadness = 2000 | |
8290 | |
8291 % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. | |
8292 \widowpenalty=10000 | |
8293 \clubpenalty=10000 | |
8294 | |
8295 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're | |
8296 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of | |
8297 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on | |
8298 % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. | |
8299 % | |
8300 \def\setemergencystretch{% | |
8301 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined | |
8302 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. | |
8303 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% | |
8304 \else | |
8305 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize | |
8306 \fi | |
8307 } | |
8308 | |
69769 | 8309 % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; |
8310 % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; | |
8311 % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. | |
8312 % | |
8313 % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define | |
8314 % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. | |
8315 % | |
8316 \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% | |
37713 | 8317 \voffset = #3\relax |
8318 \topskip = #6\relax | |
8319 \splittopskip = \topskip | |
8320 % | |
8321 \vsize = #1\relax | |
8322 \advance\vsize by \topskip | |
8323 \outervsize = \vsize | |
8324 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin | |
8325 \pageheight = \vsize | |
8326 % | |
8327 \hsize = #2\relax | |
8328 \outerhsize = \hsize | |
8329 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in | |
8330 \pagewidth = \hsize | |
8331 % | |
8332 \normaloffset = #4\relax | |
8333 \bindingoffset = #5\relax | |
8334 % | |
69769 | 8335 \ifpdf |
8336 \pdfpageheight #7\relax | |
8337 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax | |
78048 | 8338 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in |
8339 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in | |
69769 | 8340 \fi |
8341 % | |
47284 | 8342 \setleading{\textleading} |
8343 % | |
37713 | 8344 \parindent = \defaultparindent |
8345 \setemergencystretch | |
8346 } | |
8347 | |
8348 % @letterpaper (the default). | |
8349 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
8350 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | |
47284 | 8351 \textleading = 13.2pt |
37713 | 8352 % |
8353 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. | |
69769 | 8354 \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}% |
8355 {\voffset}{.25in}% | |
8356 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% | |
8357 {11in}{8.5in}% | |
37713 | 8358 }} |
8359 | |
69769 | 8360 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. |
37713 | 8361 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 |
8362 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt | |
47284 | 8363 \textleading = 12pt |
37713 | 8364 % |
69769 | 8365 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% |
78048 | 8366 {-.2in}{0in}% |
69769 | 8367 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% |
8368 {9.25in}{7in}% | |
37713 | 8369 % |
8370 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in | |
8371 \tolerance = 700 | |
8372 \hfuzz = 1pt | |
8373 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | |
8374 \defbodyindent = .5cm | |
69769 | 8375 }} |
8376 | |
8377 % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. | |
8378 % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) | |
8379 \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
8380 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt | |
8381 \textleading = 12pt | |
8382 % | |
8383 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% | |
8384 {-.2in}{-.4in}% | |
8385 {0pt}{14pt}% | |
8386 {9in}{6in}% | |
8387 % | |
8388 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in | |
8389 \tolerance = 700 | |
8390 \hfuzz = 1pt | |
8391 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | |
8392 \defbodyindent = .4cm | |
37713 | 8393 }} |
8394 | |
8395 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. | |
8396 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
8397 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | |
69769 | 8398 \textleading = 13.2pt |
8399 % | |
8400 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 | |
8401 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. | |
8402 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust | |
8403 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then | |
8404 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in | |
8405 % your texinfo source file like this: | |
8406 % @tex | |
8407 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm | |
8408 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm | |
8409 % @end tex | |
8410 \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm} | |
8411 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% | |
8412 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | |
8413 {297mm}{210mm}% | |
37713 | 8414 % |
8415 \tolerance = 700 | |
8416 \hfuzz = 1pt | |
69769 | 8417 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
8418 \defbodyindent = 5mm | |
37713 | 8419 }} |
8420 | |
8421 % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. | |
8422 % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. | |
8423 % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. | |
8424 \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
8425 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt | |
47284 | 8426 \textleading = 12.5pt |
37713 | 8427 % |
69769 | 8428 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% |
8429 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% | |
8430 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% | |
8431 {210mm}{148mm}% | |
37713 | 8432 % |
8433 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in | |
8434 \tolerance = 800 | |
8435 \hfuzz = 1.2pt | |
69769 | 8436 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
37713 | 8437 \defbodyindent = 2mm |
8438 \tableindent = 12mm | |
8439 }} | |
8440 | |
69769 | 8441 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. |
37713 | 8442 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 |
8443 \afourpaper | |
69769 | 8444 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% |
8445 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% | |
8446 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | |
8447 {297mm}{210mm}% | |
8448 % | |
8449 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. | |
37713 | 8450 \globaldefs = 0 |
8451 }} | |
8452 | |
69769 | 8453 % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. |
8454 \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
37713 | 8455 \afourpaper |
69769 | 8456 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% |
8457 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% | |
8458 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | |
8459 {297mm}{210mm}% | |
8460 \globaldefs = 0 | |
8461 }} | |
37713 | 8462 |
8463 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] | |
8464 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, | |
8465 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. | |
8466 % | |
69769 | 8467 \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} |
37713 | 8468 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% |
8469 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi | |
8470 \globaldefs = 1 | |
8471 % | |
8472 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | |
47284 | 8473 \setleading{\textleading}% |
37713 | 8474 % |
69769 | 8475 \dimen0 = #1 |
8476 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset | |
8477 % | |
8478 \dimen2 = \hsize | |
8479 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset | |
8480 % | |
8481 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% | |
8482 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% | |
8483 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | |
8484 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% | |
37713 | 8485 }} |
8486 | |
8487 % Set default to letter. | |
8488 % | |
8489 \letterpaper | |
8490 | |
8491 | |
8492 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} | |
8493 | |
8494 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. | |
8495 \catcode`\"=\other | |
8496 \catcode`\~=\other | |
8497 \catcode`\^=\other | |
8498 \catcode`\_=\other | |
8499 \catcode`\|=\other | |
8500 \catcode`\<=\other | |
8501 \catcode`\>=\other | |
8502 \catcode`\+=\other | |
8503 \catcode`\$=\other | |
8504 \def\normaldoublequote{"} | |
8505 \def\normaltilde{~} | |
8506 \def\normalcaret{^} | |
8507 \def\normalunderscore{_} | |
8508 \def\normalverticalbar{|} | |
8509 \def\normalless{<} | |
8510 \def\normalgreater{>} | |
8511 \def\normalplus{+} | |
47284 | 8512 \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix |
37713 | 8513 |
69769 | 8514 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt |
8515 % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, | |
37713 | 8516 % where something hairier probably needs to be done. |
8517 % | |
8518 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print | |
8519 % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero | |
8520 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all | |
8521 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. | |
8522 % | |
8523 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} | |
8524 | |
8525 % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches | |
8526 % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from | |
8527 % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway | |
8528 % this is not a problem. | |
8529 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} | |
8530 | |
8531 % Turn off all special characters except @ | |
8532 % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). | |
8533 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can | |
8534 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. | |
8535 | |
8536 \catcode`\"=\active | |
8537 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} | |
8538 \let"=\activedoublequote | |
8539 \catcode`\~=\active | |
8540 \def~{{\tt\char126}} | |
8541 \chardef\hat=`\^ | |
8542 \catcode`\^=\active | |
8543 \def^{{\tt \hat}} | |
8544 | |
8545 \catcode`\_=\active | |
8546 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} | |
69769 | 8547 \let\realunder=_ |
37713 | 8548 % Subroutine for the previous macro. |
69769 | 8549 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } |
37713 | 8550 |
8551 \catcode`\|=\active | |
8552 \def|{{\tt\char124}} | |
8553 \chardef \less=`\< | |
8554 \catcode`\<=\active | |
8555 \def<{{\tt \less}} | |
8556 \chardef \gtr=`\> | |
8557 \catcode`\>=\active | |
8558 \def>{{\tt \gtr}} | |
8559 \catcode`\+=\active | |
8560 \def+{{\tt \char 43}} | |
8561 \catcode`\$=\active | |
47284 | 8562 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix |
37713 | 8563 |
8564 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file | |
8565 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. | |
8566 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. | |
8567 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. | |
8568 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} | |
8569 | |
69769 | 8570 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after |
8571 % parsing them. | |
8572 \def\turnoffactive{% | |
8573 \normalturnoffactive | |
8574 \otherbackslash | |
8575 } | |
8576 | |
37713 | 8577 \catcode`\@=0 |
8578 | |
69769 | 8579 % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, |
8580 % as in \char`\\. | |
8581 \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ | |
8582 \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work | |
8583 | |
8584 % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and | |
8585 % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). | |
8586 {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} | |
8587 | |
8588 % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash | |
8589 % in fixed width font. | |
37713 | 8590 \catcode`\\=\active |
69769 | 8591 @def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}} |
8592 % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: | |
8593 % @let \ = @normalbackslash | |
8594 | |
8595 % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. | |
8596 % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with | |
8597 % catcode other. | |
8598 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} | |
8599 @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} | |
8600 | |
8601 % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of | |
8602 % the literal character `\'. | |
8603 % | |
8604 @def@normalturnoffactive{% | |
8605 @let\=@normalbackslash | |
8606 @let"=@normaldoublequote | |
8607 @let~=@normaltilde | |
8608 @let^=@normalcaret | |
8609 @let_=@normalunderscore | |
8610 @let|=@normalverticalbar | |
8611 @let<=@normalless | |
8612 @let>=@normalgreater | |
8613 @let+=@normalplus | |
8614 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix | |
8615 @unsepspaces | |
8616 } | |
37713 | 8617 |
8618 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. | |
8619 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. | |
8620 @otherifyactive | |
8621 | |
8622 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. | |
8623 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing | |
8624 % a backslash. | |
8625 % | |
8626 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} | |
8627 @global@let\ = @eatinput | |
8628 | |
8629 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then | |
69769 | 8630 % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix |
37713 | 8631 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. |
69769 | 8632 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input |
37713 | 8633 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. |
8634 % | |
8635 @gdef@fixbackslash{% | |
8636 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi | |
8637 @catcode`+=@active | |
8638 @catcode`@_=@active | |
8639 } | |
8640 | |
8641 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. | |
8642 @escapechar = `@@ | |
8643 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
47284
diff
changeset
|
8644 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. |
37713 | 8645 @catcode`@& = @other |
8646 @catcode`@# = @other | |
8647 @catcode`@% = @other | |
8648 | |
8649 | |
8650 @c Local variables: | |
8651 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) | |
8652 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" | |
8653 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" | |
8654 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" | |
8655 @c time-stamp-end: "}" | |
8656 @c End: | |
52401 | 8657 |
69769 | 8658 @c vim:sw=2: |
8659 | |
52790
a93f1f4e2e49
Replace `%' in arch tagline by @ignore.
Luc Teirlinck <teirllm@auburn.edu>
parents:
52401
diff
changeset
|
8660 @ignore |
a93f1f4e2e49
Replace `%' in arch tagline by @ignore.
Luc Teirlinck <teirllm@auburn.edu>
parents:
52401
diff
changeset
|
8661 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 |
a93f1f4e2e49
Replace `%' in arch tagline by @ignore.
Luc Teirlinck <teirllm@auburn.edu>
parents:
52401
diff
changeset
|
8662 @end ignore |